Deutsch
EnglishCONTROLS for your BMW 5 Series 2024-2025
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Dashboard
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Vehicle features and options
Additional information:
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1
Roller sunblind 98
Safety switch 99
Power windows 96
Memory function 118
Seat settings menu 48
2
3
6
7
Buttons for the central locking system 91
Unlocking
4
5
Exterior mirror adjustment button 116
Seating comfort features
Locking
Lights
32
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Exterior lighting menu 48
Audio, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 6
Automatic High Beam Assistant
165
Voice control, BMW Intelligent
Personal Assistant 55
Driving lights automatic 167
Low-beam headlights 167
Adaptive lighting functions 170
Exterior lighting off 167
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Selection of configuration menus
for instrument cluster and Head-
up display 143
8
9
Turn signal lever
Turn signal 164
Using selection lists 153
Accessing and resetting trip data
158
High-beam headlights, head-
light flasher 164
Resetting the G-Meter values
160
Steering wheel buttons, left
13 Wiper lever
Turn speed control systems on/off
221
Wipers 173
Select speed control system 221
Rain sensor 173
Store speed 221
Cleaning the windshield 174
Adjusting the speed 221
14
15
16
17
Horn, entire surface
10 Shift paddles 132
Sport Boost function 134
11 Instrument cluster 143
12 Steering wheel buttons, right
Adjusting the steering wheel 118
Unlocking the hood, behind the
footwell trim 355
Settings, instrument cluster 143
Settings for Head-up display 145
Opening and closing cargo area
83
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
33
Dashboard
CONTROLS
In the vicinity of the center console
1
Control display 49
Hazard warning system 371
Adjusting the volume
Station/title forward
Station/title back
2
Defrost function 284
Rear window defroster 284
6
7
My Modes 135
3
4
5
Ventilation 286
Controller with buttons 51
Parking assistance systems 247
Vehicle settings menu 48
Operating elements for entertainment sys-
tem, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
8
9
Automatic Hold 140
Parking brake 138
Selector lever 130
34
Dashboard
CONTROLS
10
Turning drive-ready state on/off
127
In the vicinity of the headliner
1
Emergency Call, SOS 373
Sliding glass sunroof 99
5
6
7
Interior lights 171
2
Camera
Gesture control 60.
Interior camera 298
Indicator light, front passenger
airbag 178
3
4
Reading lights 171
Interior lighting menu 48
Fixed glass sunroof 102
35
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle
Vehicle features and options Cameras
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
Front camera
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the following
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-
cle:
The front camera is located in the radiator
grille.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Camera behind the windshield
Camera behind the windshield.
Top view cameras.
Rearview camera.
Front radar sensor.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
The camera behind the windshield is located
near the interior mirror.
36
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
When the camera field of view is covered,
for instance by a fogged up windshield or
labels.
Top view cameras
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
With exterior mirrors folded in.
With open doors or open cargo area.
When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections, e.g., setting sun.
▷
▷
When it is dark outside.
The camera has overheated due to exces-
sive temperatures and temporarily turned
off.
One exterior mirror camera is located at the
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.
▷
During calibration of the camera immedi-
ately after vehicle delivery.
Rearview camera
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Radar sensors
Safety information
Warning
The rearview camera is located in the handle
strip on the rear of the vehicle.
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the
driver assistance systems can be impaired by
external influences, e.g., interference. There
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-
age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Functional requirement of the
cameras
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 379.
Vehicle care, refer to page 380.
System limits of the cameras
The cameras may not work properly, e.g.,
show something that is incorrect, in the follow-
ing situations:
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
37
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Front radar sensor
Functional requirement of the radar
sensors
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and
clear.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 379.
Vehicle care, refer to page 380.
System limits of the radar sensors
The function of the radar sensors may be re-
stricted or not available, for instance in the fol-
lowing situations:
The front radar sensor is located in the radiator
grille.
▷
▷
▷
In case of dirty sensors.
Radar sensors, side, front
In case of iced-up sensors.
If sensors are covered such as by labels,
films or a license-plate carrier.
▷
▷
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow
hills, vehicles or trailers.
The radar sensors are located on the side of
the front bumper.
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the
road.
Radar sensors, side, rear
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
The radar sensors are located on the side of
the rear bumper.
38
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Functional requirement of the
ultrasonic sensors
Ultrasonic sensors
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean
and clear.
Ultrasonic sensors, front
Additional information:
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 379.
Vehicle care, refer to page 380.
System limits of the ultrasonic
sensors
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in
the following situations:
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the front bumper.
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by
stickers.
Ultrasonic sensors, rear
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷
▷
For small children and animals.
For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance jacket.
▷
▷
With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
In case of external interference with the
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic
sources.
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.
Ultrasonic sensors, side
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-
treme heat, or strong wind.
With tow bars and trailer hitches of other
vehicles.
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
With moving objects.
With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
The ultrasonic sensors for the parking assis-
tance systems are located on the sides of the
front and rear bumpers.
39
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
In the case of objects with fine surfaces or
structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.
With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷
▷
Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can be outside of the detection
ranges of the sensors.
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷
▷
▷
With plants and bushes.
In automatic car washes.
In the event of uneven floors, e.g. speed
bumps.
▷
▷
If there are large amounts of exhaust gas.
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
ultrasonic sensors.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
40
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Operating state of the vehicle
Operating
element
Function
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Start/Stop button.
Volume button.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
Idle state
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in
one of the three states:
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.
Principle
Standby state.
Drive-ready state.
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched
off.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
from the outside and after exiting and locking.
Overview
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
41
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Establishing idle state when
opening the front doors
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,
all passengers must exit the vehicle.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Warning
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
5. "Turn off after opening door"
Establishing the sleep mode
manually
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-
pletion of trip:
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
Press and hold the volume but-
ton on the center console until
all displays go out.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
Deep sleep mode
Principle
Deep sleep mode is activated to prevent the
vehicle battery from discharging when the ve-
hicle is stationary for several weeks.
Establishing the sleep mode
automatically
The sleep mode is established automatically
such as in the following situations:
In deep sleep mode, the vehicle functions are
limited to the essentials.
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
General information
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, some special measures are nec-
essary. For more information, contact an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Depending on the configuration via iDrive:
one or both front doors will be opened after
driving when exiting the vehicle.
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or
when the low-beam headlights are switched
on.
Activating/deactivating deep sleep
mode
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
42
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
3. "System settings"
Via the volume button
4. "Deep sleep mode"
5. Select the desired setting.
Push the volume button on the
center console. The control dis-
play and the instrument cluster
illuminate.
Deep sleep mode deactivates automatically
when drive-ready state is turned on.
Access to the vehicle
Using the Start/Stop button
Press the Start/Stop button.
The control display and the instrument
cluster illuminate.
Display in the instrument cluster
OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. Drive-ready state
is turned off and standby state
turned on.
Press the button on the cargo area to access
the vehicle while in deep sleep mode. Deep
sleep mode remains on in this case.
Drive-ready state
Standby state
Principle
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
Principle
When standby state is switched on, most func-
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.
General information
Some vehicle functions can only be used with
the drive-ready state switched on.
General information
The vehicle is in standby state after the front
doors are opened from the outside.
Safety information
Manually setting to standby
DANGER
General information
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-
hicle is automatically set to idle state.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.
43
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Warning
Turning on the drive-ready state
1. Depress the brake pedal.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
gine starts.
Most of the indicator lights and warning lights
on the instrument cluster illuminate for differ-
ent lengths of time.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this
case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Additional information:
Power gauge, refer to page 154.
Display in the instrument cluster
The activated drive-ready state is indicated
in the instrument cluster, depending on the
equipment, by the display of information re-
quired for driving or the READY display.
NOTICE
Repeatedly attempting to start the engine or
repeatedly starting the vehicle in rapid suc-
cession can cause the starter to overheat.
This also results in unburned or inadequately
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-
verter to overheat. There is a risk of property
damage. Avoid repeated starting of the vehi-
cle, particularly repeated starting in rapid suc-
cession.
Turning off drive-ready state
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the
parking brake.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
switches into standby state.
Turning on the drive-ready state
General information
Drive-ready state is turned on
using the Start/Stop button.
44
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
Safety information
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Display and operating
concept
Principle
Main menu
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-
ating concept and includes a wide range of
functions.
General information
The main menu is divided into different areas.
General information
Overview
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions
can be operated as follows:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the control display.
Via the Controller.
Via the touchpad.
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
Via the gesture control.
Via the operating elements on the steering
wheel.
1
Widgets
Additional information:
2
3
4
5
Status information
Configuration bar for main display
Temperature setting
Menu bar
Instrument cluster, refer to page 143.
45
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Android Auto© menu
Menu bar
Depending on the national-market version
with a connected function: access to Android
Auto. Android Auto enables the secure use
of certain functions of a compatible Android
smartphone via iDrive.
Apps menu
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A
filter can be selected. If necessary, change the
filter to see the apps you want.
▷
▷
▷
▷
"All apps": All apps and functions are dis-
played.
Widgets
Widgets show real-time information and dy-
namic content such as current media or paired
smartphones. The widgets also serve as but-
tons and allow jumping to the relevant menu.
"Infotainment": Only infotainment apps are
displayed.
"Vehicle": Only vehicle adjustment func-
tions are displayed.
"Recently used": The most recently used
apps are displayed.
Main display
The main display shows real-time information
and dynamic content such as the navigation
map. This display also contains buttons and
lets you jump to the desired menu.
Media menu
Access to functions of the entertainment
system, e.g., radio stations or connection with
external devices.
Status information
Communication menu
General information
Access to the telephone and message
function as well as the connection and man-
agement of mobile devices such as smart-
phones.
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the control display. Status information is dis-
played in the form of icons. Depending on the
equipment and national-market version, differ-
ent icons are available.
Navigation menu
Access to the navigation system, destina-
tion input and traffic bulletins. Configurable
map views and other functions such as points
of interest.
Telephone status information
Icon
Meaning
Active call.
Climate menu
Signal strength.
SIM card missing.
The Climate menu provides access to all
climate control functions.
Entertainment status information
Apple CarPlay© menu
Depending on the national-market version
with a connected function: access to Apple
CarPlay. Apple CarPlay enables the secure
use of certain functions of a compatible Apple
iPhone via iDrive.
Icon Meaning
USB audio.
Bluetooth audio.
Smartphone audio.
46
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Input and display
Icon Meaning
Connected Music with Spotify.
Letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice
control, depending on vehicle equipment.
Time shift.
Wi-Fi.
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Icon
Function
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between languages.
Use voice control.
Status information messages
Icon Meaning
Number of notifications.
Check Control message.
Suppress private information.
Do not disturb.
Confirm entry.
Shift the input area to the left
or right.
Entry comparison
Message.
When entering data from a database such as
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed
down for each character entered, with charac-
ters being added as necessary.
Additional information:
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Some menu items are preceded by an icon.
Selecting the menu item enables or disables
the function.
Other status information
Icon Meaning
Sound output active.
Icon
Meaning
Sound output deactivated.
Activation word active.
BMW ID or driver profile.
Destination guidance active.
Go to quick access.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Enabling/disabling audible feedback
For some functions, audio confirmation is
given, e.g., sounds are emitted when operating
the control display.
Wireless charging active.
Park Distance Control: sound active.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-
vated.
3. "System settings"
47
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
4. "Sound"
Shortcuts can only be created with an active
BMW ID or a driver profile.
5. Select the desired setting.
Executing a function
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
Quick access
The quick link provides access to shortcuts,
certain settings, and app recommendations.
2. Tap the desired shortcut.
Input
Operation
The function will work immediately. This
means for instance that the connection is es-
tablished when a phone number is selected.
Show
Swipe from top to bottom on the
quick link. control display.
Slide the controller up.
Tap the icon on the status
bar.
Swipe from the bottom up on the
quick link. control display.
Slide the controller down.
Deleting shortcuts
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
Hide
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.
3. "Delete shortcut"
Activating/deactivating pop-ups
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed
automatically on the control display. Some of
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
Direct access
General information
The vehicle has buttons that can be used to
access menus for the respective function di-
rectly on the control display. Then continue the
operation via iDrive.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Pop-ups"
Overview
5. Select the desired setting.
Button Function
Shortcuts
Go to the Drive Settings menu on
the center console.
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the
shortcuts and called up directly, for instance
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and menu entries.
Go to the Exterior Lighting menu be-
tween the steering wheel and driv-
er’s door.
Go to the Interior Lighting menu on
the headliner.
Storing a function
1. Select the desired function.
2. Press and hold the desired function.
3. "Add to shortcuts"
Go to the Seat Settings menu on the
driver’s door.
48
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Safety information
BMW Curved Display
Warning
Principle
When driving, loose items or devices con-
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen
display in the instrument panel that is curved
towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display
comprises the instrument cluster on the driv-
er's side and the control display.
General information
Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW
Curved Display in the Care chapter.
Additional information:
Warning
Caring for special components, refer to
page 382.
Objects in the area in front of a display can
slip and damage the display. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Do not
place objects in the area in front of a display.
Overview
Overview
1
Instrument cluster 143
Control display 49
2
Control display.
Control display
Switching the control display on/off
automatically
The control display is turned on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
control display is needed for operation.
Principle
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-
trol display.
In certain situations, the control display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-
eral minutes.
49
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Switching the control display on/off
manually
Overview
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
2. "Screen off"
Tap the control display to turn it on again.
Setting the brightness
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Controller
3. "Displays"
Buttons on the Controller
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Make the desired setting.
Button
Function
Call up the main menu.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Go to Media menu.
Go to Phone menu.
Go to Navigation menu.
Go to previous menu.
System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
control display, for instance due to intense so-
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the
temperature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning system, the normal
functions are restored.
Controller
Principle
Operation
The Controller can be used to select menu
items and enter the settings. The buttons can
be used to open the menus directly.
▷
Rotate the Controller to switch between
menu options, for example.
50
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Selecting menu items
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Adjusting the main display
The main display can be adjusted in the main
menu.
▷
Press the Controller to select a menu
option, for example.
1.
Press the button.
2. If necessary, tilt the Controller to select the
main display.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. Select the desired main display.
Selecting a widget
1. Use the Controller to select widgets.
2. If necessary, turn the Controller until the de-
sired widget is selected.
▷
Slide the Controller in four directions to
switch between menus, for example.
3. Press the Controller.
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main
menu. The adjustments can only be performed
when the vehicle is stationary.
1. Press the button, if needed
.
2. Using the Controller, select the widget, then
press and hold the Controller.
Operating via the Controller
3. The following adjustments can be made:
▷
"Add widget below"
Opening the main menu
A new widget can be added below the
selected widget.
Press the button.
▷
▷
"Delete widget page"
The widget is deleted.
"Sort widgets"
The main menu is displayed.
The widget can be moved to the desired
position.
51
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
A new widget can be added at the end of the
list.
Deleting an entry
Icon Function
Tap the icon at the end of the list.
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-
ber.
Switching between menus
A new display opens after a menu item is se-
lected.
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
▷
Slide the Controller to the left.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box.
▷
Press the button.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
Calling up the context menu
Depending on the menu item, a context menu
with additional options can be displayed.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
1. Select the desired menu item using the
Controller.
Operation via touchpad
2. Press and hold the Controller.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive
functions can be operated with the controller
touchpad.
The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-
er's Manual.
The touchpad is located on the Controller.
Touch the touchpad with your fingers. Do not
use any objects.
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as
shortcut.
Entering letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can only be entered
when stationary.
Selecting functions
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Input
3. "System settings"
4. "Touchpad"
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-
bers.
5. Select the desired setting.
2.
: confirm entry.
Additional information:
Setting the system language, refer to
page 57.
52
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Entering letters and numbers
Using alphabetical lists
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-
try exists.
▷
Enter characters as they are displayed on
the control display.
▷
Always enter associated characters such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized.
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed
in the list.
▷
The set language determines what input
is possible. Where necessary, enter special
characters via the Controller.
Operation via control display
Additional information:
Setting the system language, refer to
page 57.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the con-
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.
Entering special characters
You can tap on menu items and widgets.
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do
not use any objects.
Function
Operation
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the
ter.
touchpad.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the icon.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
The main menu is displayed.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touch-
pad.
Adjusting the main display
The main display can be adjusted in the main
menu.
Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the
score.
lower area of the touch-
pad.
1.
Tap on the icon.
2. Swipe the configuration bar on the right
side of the screen to the left.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
3. Select the desired main display.
Switching between widgets
Widgets in the main menu display dynamic in-
formation and can be used as buttons.
Tap the map on the control display and then
continue operation using the touchpad.
Function
Operation
To switch between widgets, scroll up or down
through the widgets.
Move map.
Swipe in the appropriate di-
rection.
To display additional functions of the widgets,
scroll left or right within the widgets.
Display menu. Tap once.
53
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Adjusting widgets
Entering letters and numbers
The widgets can be adjusted in the main
menu. The adjustments can only be performed
when the vehicle is stationary.
Input
1. If necessary, tap the
display.
icon or control
1. If necessary,
tap the icon.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
2. Press and hold the widget.
3. The following adjustments can be made:
Deleting an entry
▷
"Add widget below"
Icon Function
A new widget can be added below the
selected widget.
Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.
▷
▷
"Delete widget page"
The widget is deleted.
"Sort widgets"
Press and hold the icon: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
The widget can be moved to the desired
position.
Using the map
The navigation map can be moved on the con-
trol display.
A new widget can be added at the end of the
list.
Function
Operation
Tap the icon at the end of the list.
Move map.
Swipe in the appropriate
direction.
Sorting apps
To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-
sired icon and move it to the desired location.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin-
gers.
Display menu.
Tap once.
Switching between menus
A new display opens after a menu item is se-
lected.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box.
Select the arrow symbol.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.
A letter box is displayed.
Calling up the context menu
Depending on the menu item, a context menu
with additional options can be displayed.
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
Press and hold the desired menu item.
The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-
er's Manual.
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as
shortcut.
54
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the
ConnectedDrive Store.
BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant
Suggestions, refer to page 58.
Principle
Activating the voice control system
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
operation of various vehicle functions. The
Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate
the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions
and automating habits.
General information
There are various methods for activating the
voice control feature:
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly.
General information
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-
tive.
▷
▷
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-
able depending on national-market version.
Speaking the activation word.
The system includes special microphones
on the driver side and front passenger side.
The microphones on the driver's or front
passenger's side are active with the follow-
ing voice control, depending on where the
activation word was spoken.
Say the commands and numbers fluently
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,
and speed.
Then say the command. The activation word
and the command can be spoken without
pause in one sentence.
▷
›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-
ken.
Functional requirements
Microphone button on steering wheel
▷
A language that is supported by the Per-
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
1.
Press button briefly.
Setting the system language, refer to
page 57.
2. Say the command.
Activation word
General information
▷
Always say commands in the configured
system language.
For the full range of functions, you must acti-
vate, configure, or purchase the following func-
tions:
Saying the activation word will start the Per-
sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis-
tens.
▷
Online speech processing, refer to
page 58.
▷
For all settings under
Preset activation word
Data protection, refer to page 69.
Activation word, refer to page 55.
BMW ID or a driver profile.
›Hello BMW‹: The default activation word can
be activated and deactivated.
▷
▷
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
55
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
4. "Voice control"
5. "Additional speech assistants"
6. Select the desired setting.
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Wake word"
Canceling voice control
7. ""Hello BMW""
Personal activation word
▷
Press the button on the steering
In addition to the preset activation word, a
personal activation word can be set up with
an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-
sonal activation word can also be changed or
deleted.
wheel again.
▷
▷
▷
›Cancel‹
Slide the Controller to the right or left.
Press the Controller.
The activation word should consist of multiple
syllables to ensure good recognition.
Possible commands
›Hello‹: The additional phrase is not necessary
for the activation word and does not need to
be spoken.
General information
Commands can be used to give instructions
or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant
providing assistance.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
For example, you can call contacts, navigate
to an address, apply settings, or ask questions
about a vehicle function. Most vehicle functions
can be operated via voice commands, e.g., the
Automatic Parking Assistant.
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Wake word"
Most content on the control display can be
spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list
entries.
7. "Personal wake word"
8. "Set"
9. "Start recording"
Help for voice control
Activation word from third-party providers
▷
›Voice commands‹: have possible example
commands suggested.
Depending on national-market version, some
third-party providers offer digital voice assis-
tants, e.g., Amazon Alexa.
▷
›General information on voice control‹: have
information on the operating principle of the
voice control announced.
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-
nected via Apple CarPlay.
▷
▷
›Help‹: have tips and example commands
for voice control announced.
The activation word from connected third-
party providers can be used in addition to your
preset or personal activation word from BMW.
Additional example commands for the cur-
rent context are displayed in the widget of
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Sample commands
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
▷
›Call John Smith‹
▷
›Drive me to JFK airport‹
56
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
›Play a classical music station‹
›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹
›Activate the climate control‹
›Increase the ACC distance‹
›Sport mode‹
Example command: ›How can the passenger
airbag be deactivated?‹
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.
When stationary, the section of the integrated
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control
display.
Additional example commands can be dis-
played on the control display.
Settings
1.
Apps menu
Setting the system language
2. "All apps"
1.
Apps menu
3. "Personal Assistant"
4. "Help"
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Language"
5. "Example commands"
Sample commands for the current context are
displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal As-
sistant widget.
5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the response length
Additional information:
You can set the Personal Assistant to use
standard dialog or a short version. In case of
the short version, the announcements by the
Personal Assistant are played back in an ab-
breviated version.
Adjust widgets, refer to page 53.
Menu items
The Personal Assistant can bring up menu
items directly. Say the menu items as they are
displayed on the control display. You do not
have to follow the order of the menu items
when speaking them out loud.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
1. Activate the voice control system.
2. ›Media‹
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Response length"
7. Select the desired setting.
3. ›Presets‹
The stored stations are displayed on the
control display.
Speaking during voice output
Owner's Manual via voice operation
You can ask simple questions about vehicle
functions and the operation of the vehicle.
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-
abled if requests are often canceled uninten-
tionally, for instance due to background noise
or conversations in the vehicle.
The voice activation system and the feed-
back it provides do not replace the printed
or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function
is available depending on the national-market
version. The speech recognition and quality of
the feedback may vary.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
57
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
3. "System settings"
6. "Speaking during voice output"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Online speech processing"
Suggestions
General information
Configuring the visualization
How the Personal Assistant is visualized can
be set.
The Personal Assistant provides helpful, indi-
vidual suggestions.
Activating/deactivating suggestions
1.
Apps menu
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Visualization"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Receive suggestions"
Voice control from third-party
providers
Adapting suggestions
Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by
category or to output a signal tone.
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party
voice control can be enabled by pressing and
holding the microphone button on the steering
wheel.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
1.
Apps menu
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Long press"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. Select the desired setting.
6. Select the desired setting.
Online speech processing
Online speech processing improves the quality
of the speech recognition and search results
for points of interest. To use the functions,
data is transmitted to a service provider via an
encrypted connection and stored locally there.
An active ConnectedDrive contract is required
for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is
available depending on the national-market
version. Online speech processing is not avail-
able in all languages.
Voice control in rear
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Personal
Assistant can be started and operated from
the rear by saying the activation word.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
1.
Apps menu
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Rear voice control"
2. "Vehicle"
58
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-
ance until the desired volume is set.
Activating Amazon Alexa Car
Integration
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in
the vehicle and My BMW app if necessary.
The volume remains constant even if the vol-
ume of other audio sources is changed.
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa
app to set it up in the vehicle.
Using the voice activation of the
smartphone
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice
control.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Amazon Alexa"
4. Select the desired setting.
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the
vehicle as follows:
The device must be connected via Apple Car-
Play or Android Auto.
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-
sired command.
1. Press and hold the
button on the
Information about the active function is dis-
played on the control display. If the function
is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as
necessary.
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
The voice activation of the smartphone is
activated.
If activation is successful, a confirmation
appears on the control display.
Automating routines
General information
2. Press and hold the
button on the
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
for instance the automatic opening of windows
in the same place. Rules are created for this
purpose, which can be activated and deacti-
vated at any time.
steering wheel to cancel voice control of the
smartphone.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration
Principle
Activating/deactivating routines
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-
pending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-
cle.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Automate habits"
4. Select the desired setting.
System limits
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-
tion about vehicle functions that may not be
installed in the vehicle.
Functional requirements
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.
▷
An active Amazon account must exist.
59
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
This also applies to safety functions and
systems.
The camera in the headliner detects gestures
that are carried out in the area of the center
console at the height of the control display.
▷
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-
dows closed.
The camera of the gesture control uses an in-
visible Class 1 laser.
Noises from the front passenger or occu-
pants can impair the system. Avoid making
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
Activate/deactivate gesture control
1.
Apps menu
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-
lems with the speech recognition feature.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Gesture control"
A poor data connection affects the re-
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
search function.
Settings
BMW Gesture Control
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Principle
Several iDrive functions can be operated by
hand motion using BMW Gesture Control.
3. "System settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. Select the desired setting.
Overview
Carrying out gestures
▷
Perform gestures underneath the interior
mirror and next to the steering wheel.
▷
▷
Execute gestures clearly.
The gestures can also be executed from
the front-passenger side.
60
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Possible gestures
Gesture
Operation
Function
Move extended index finger forward and Accept call.
backward in the direction of the control
Select a highlighted entry in a
list during voice control.
display.
Confirm pop-up.
Swipe the hand in front of the control
display in the direction of the passenger
seat.
Reject call.
Close pop-up.
End voice control.
Move extended index finger slowly in a
clockwise circular movement.
Increase the volume.
Gesture is detected after one circular
movement.
Move the extended index finger counter- Reduce the volume.
clockwise in a circular movement.
Gesture is detected after one circular
movement.
Depending on the
equipment:
Bring thumb and index finger together
and move the hand to the right or left.
Turn vehicle in the Live Vehi-
cle view.
3D view: rotate camera view.
This gesture can only be exe-
cuted while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Move fist with thumb extended to the left Reverse Skip function.
back and forth.
The previous title is played.
Move fist with thumb extended to the
right back and forth.
Forward Skip function.
The next title is played.
61
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Gesture
Operation
Function
With the index and middle fingers ex-
tended, point into the direction of the
control display.
Perform individually assigna-
ble gesture.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and
stretch five fingers out again.
Perform individually assigna-
ble gesture.
5. "Point two fingers at display" or "Show five-
o-five fingers"
Assigning gesture individually
General information
6. Select the desired setting.
Two gestures can be assigned individually and
can be configured as shortcut for certain func-
tions such as:
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera in the
headliner can be disturbed by the following cir-
cumstances:
▷
▷
▷
Destination guidance to home address.
Mute/Playback
▷
▷
▷
The camera lens is covered.
Control display on/off
Objects are located on the interior mirror.
Gesture shortcuts can only be created with an
active BMW ID or a driver profile.
The camera lens is dirty, clean camera
lens.
Configure gesture shortcut
The desired function can be selected directly in
every menu and configured as shortcut.
Sensors and camera lenses, refer to
page 380.
▷
The gesture is executed outside of the de-
tection range.
1. Press and hold the desired menu item.
2. "Add to gesture shortcuts"
▷
▷
Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
Smoking in the car's interior.
3. Select the desired gesture.
Select function
Some defined functions can be selected di-
rectly in the menu for gesture control.
Connecting mobile devices
to the vehicle
1.
Apps menu
Principle
2. "Vehicle"
Various connection modes are available for us-
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-
tion mode to select depends on the mobile de-
vice and desired function.
3. "System settings"
4. "Gesture control"
62
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
accident, injury, and property damage. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.
General information
Detailed information on the functions and con-
nection modes is provided in the following me-
dia from the Owner's Manual under the speci-
fied keyword:
▷
▷
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Overview
Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,
communication and entertainment.
The following overview shows possible func-
tions and suitable connection modes for them.
The range of functions depends on the vehicle
equipment and the mobile device.
The following information sources can also be
used:
▷
▷
Driver’s Guide app.
Driver’s Guide Web.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
Function
Connection mode
Icon on the con-
trol display
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.
tem.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.
Playing music from a mobile device.
Keyword: audio.
Bluetooth audio.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Calling without a mobile phone.
Personal eSIM.
Keyword: calling with the Personal
eSIM.
Keyword: Personal eSIM.
Data exchange between mobile de-
vice and vehicle.
Wi-Fi.
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.
Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.
hotspot.
Keyword: personal hotspot.
63
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Function
Connection mode
Icon on the con-
trol display
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and
via voice control.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
voice control.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.
Playing music from a USB device.
Keyword: audio.
USB.
Keyword: USB connection.
Additional information:
USB port, refer to page 295.
64
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Functional requirements
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
BMW Remote Software
Upgrade
▷
▷
Cellular network reception.
Consent to transmit the corresponding data
was given in the Data Protection menu.
Principle
Additional information:
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-
date the entire software of the vehicle. This
makes new functions, functional enhance-
ments or quality improvements available.
Data protection, refer to page 69.
Search for an upgrade
Functional requirement
Standby must be turned on to search for a
Remote Software Upgrade.
General information
BMW recommends performing the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes
available.
Automatic search
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in
the background.
Safety information
Warning
Manual search
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Search for upgrades"
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
65
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
Download of an upgrade
Information about the version
Automatic download
General information
If available, the data for a Remote Software
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. No download consent is required.
The information about the version contains a
description of the updates included in the Re-
mote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been successfully
completed, the information about the version
can be displayed on the control display.
Via My BMW App
If an upgrade is available, information on the
new software version is displayed in the My
BMW App.
This information is also available in the Con-
nectedDrive customer portal.
The data for the upgrade can then be down-
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an
existing WLAN connection.
Displaying information
Display in the vehicle:
Data can then be sent from the mobile device
to the vehicle.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
This transmission method accelerates the
download of the data, for instance in areas
with limited mobile network availability.
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5.
▷
Display currently installed version:
"Installed version:"
You do not need to be present in the vehicle to
download the data to a mobile device.
▷
Display new available version:
"Info on version"
1. Download the upgrade using the My BMW
App on your smartphone.
2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via
Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:
Data for the upgrade is sent from the mo-
bile device to the vehicle both while driving
and when stopped. Depending on the size
of the upgrade, it may be necessary to drive
your vehicle to complete the data transfer.
Installing the upgrade
General information
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
▷
Installation of the Remote Software Up-
grade may result in the deletion of software
changes, e.g., performance increases not
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
Additional information:
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,
see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, Communication.
▷
Modifications to the electrical system of the
vehicle, for instance to control units, that
have not been made by the vehicle manu-
facturer can lead to an interruption of the
installation.
▷
The installation does not occur until the
consent was given.
66
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
▷
The installation may take around 20 to
30 minutes.
▷
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-
cle for the consent for installation.
▷
▷
The installation cannot be terminated.
▷
▷
Switch off the exterior lighting.
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-
stallation.
Remove the devices connected to the diag-
nostic socket.
▷
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-
lation.
Installing immediately
The upgrade can be installed immediately if all
prerequisites have been met.
Prerequisites for the installation
▷
Sufficiently charged battery.
1.
Apps menu
▷
The outside temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.
The selector lever position P is engaged.
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
The engine is turned off and sufficiently
cooled down.
Installing with timer
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-
requisites on the control display.
When the trip is completed, a timer can be
used to install the upgrade automatically at
a configured time such as during the night.
A later installation may make sense to meet
functional requirements, e.g., a sufficiently
cooled down engine.
Your vehicle can establish some prerequisites
automatically. Follow the instructions on the
control display.
If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-
ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be
offered for installation.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,
after longer trips.
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. Select the desired settings.
The installation starts automatically when:
Preparing the vehicle
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road.
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have
been established correctly.
▷
Cellular network reception must be ensured
so that a fault message can be sent to the
vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in-
stallation is terminated.
▷
All prerequisites continue to be met at the
time of installation.
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready
state is turned on.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the windows.
Close the glass sunroof.
Close the cargo area.
Installing via the My BMW App
Once all preparations are complete and all re-
quirements are met, the upgrade installation
Remove energy consuming devices such as
a mobile phone.
67
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
can also be started using the My BMW App
when the vehicle is parked. The upgrade in-
stallation can be started remotely.
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Follow instructions in the My BMW App.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
temporarily unavailable, for instance:
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource.
▷
▷
Hazard warning system.
Central locking system and, if necessary,
Comfort Access.
After a software update in the vehicle
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking lights.
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-
est information.
Horn.
Alarm system.
Emergency call.
Power windows.
Glass sunroof.
Sun protection.
Checking the fuel filler flap lock.
Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.
Exit warning if needed.
In vehicles with frameless doors, the window
may no longer close completely.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
After successful upgrade
The vehicle can be used again immediately.
Booked services such as Advanced Real Time
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.
After an extended stationary period, charge
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-
structions on the control display or in the My
BMW App.
68
Personal settings
CONTROLS
Personal settings
This personal data can be permanently de-
leted using iDrive.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the following
data is deleted:
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW IDs or driver profiles.
Stored radio stations.
Stored shortcuts.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions.
Data protection
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.
Data transfer
Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.
Office data, for instance voice memos.
Login accounts.
Principle
The vehicle offers different services, whose
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-
ice provider.
Digital key.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-
moved from the My BMW App and Connected-
Drive customer portal so that remote functions
can no longer be used.
General information
The data transfer can be deactivated for some
services. When the data transfer is deacti-
vated, the respective service cannot be used.
Functional requirements
Settings
▷
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
The data transfer can be configured in different
stages or individually for separate services.
▷
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.
Deleting data
1.
Apps menu
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-
tings.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
Additional information:
5. Select the desired setting.
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 69.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Reset vehicle data
Principle
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-
tory settings when the drive-ready state is
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data such as stored radio stations.
69
Personal settings
CONTROLS
switched off. Data can only be deleted while
the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle key must
be in the vehicle.
With driver recognition, a BMW ID or driver
profile can be activated as soon as you unlock
your vehicle. For this, a vehicle key or digital
key must be linked with the BMW ID or driver
profile. After unlocking, you can change the
BMW ID or driver profile.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when
the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the
guest profile.
If the synchronization of settings has been en-
abled for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal
settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.
Functional requirements
The vehicle must be stationary to create,
change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only
possible when the vehicle has cellular network
reception.
BMW ID/driver profiles
Principle
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is
the personal login for all relevant offers for the
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle
settings.
Welcome window
After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window
is shown on the control display. The type of
the welcome depends on the following prereq-
uisites:
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.
▷
The vehicle does not have a stored BMW
ID or driver profile:
If a vehicle is used by several people, each per-
son can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. If
a BMW ID is activated, the settings stored for it
are applied to the vehicle.
The welcome is neutral. An option to add a
BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.
▷
The vehicle key or the digital key has not
been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-
file:
General information
The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW
IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered
for selection. Additionally, it is possible to
add a new BMW ID or create a new driver
profile.
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW
ID can be registered via the My BMW App, in
the ConnectedDrive Portal, or through an au-
thorized service center.
A driver profile is created in the vehicle.
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or digital key:
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW
ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa-
ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is
used to log in.
The welcome is personalized, the stored
settings are activated. The BMW ID or the
driver profile can be changed.
As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on
or the control display is tapped outside of the
Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.
The vehicle can store seven BMW IDs or seven
driver profiles.
70
Personal settings
CONTROLS
It may be necessary to log in again with the
BMW ID.
Adding the BMW ID
1.
Tap the BMW ID icon or the personal
image on the status bar.
This icon is displayed on the status bar
and indicates when it is necessary to login
again.
2. "Add BMW ID"
3. Scan the displayed QR code with your
smartphone.
1. Select the BMW ID.
2. Scan the QR code shown.
4. Observe the instructions on your smart-
phone.
Another login will be attempted. Once suc-
cessfully logged in, all functions can be used
again.
▷
If you have installed the My BMW App
on your smartphone and saved your
BMW ID, the BMW ID is automatically
transferred to the vehicle.
My BMW app
▷
If you do not have a BMW ID yet, you a
new BMW ID can be registered.
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle,
the vehicle is automatically added to the My
BMW app. The My BMW App provides numer-
ous beneficial functions and settings, e.g., user
management.
5. Select the other settings you want to
change, e.g., to configure driver recognition
as desired.
Alternatively, an authorized service center can
add a vehicle to the My BMW App. In this case,
the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the
control display in the corresponding vehicle.
To configure driver recognition, the corre-
sponding vehicle key or digital key must be
detected in the vehicle.
Driver recognition can be set or changed in
the settings at a later time.
In rare cases, the use of My BMW App func-
tions for this vehicle may be restricted. More
information is shown on the control display.
6. Change any additional settings as neces-
sary.
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by
an authorized service center and added to the
vehicle. The BMW ID must then be confirmed
on the control display in the corresponding ve-
hicle.
Creating a driver profile
In countries where BMW ConnectedDrive is not
available, driver profiles can be created.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW
App.
2. "Add driver profile"
3. Enter the name for the driver profile.
4. Select the desired setting:
"Transfer settings"
Confirming a BMW ID
If the BMW ID was created by an authorized
service center and added to the vehicle, you
must then confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle:
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-
tings of the guest profile will be applied.
1. Select the BMW ID.
2. Scan the QR code shown.
Primary user
The primary user is the person who first adds
their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the
vehicle to their My BMW App. Alternatively, the
3. Follow the instructions on your smart-
phone.
71
Personal settings
CONTROLS
primary user can be defined by an authorized
service center.
gers the activation of the assigned BMW ID
or the assigned driver profile.
The primary user has access to the following
settings, for example:
▷
If another key is detected on the driver's
door after activating the BMW ID or the
driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-
file of the last key detected is activated.
▷
▷
Removing BMW IDs saved to the vehicle.
Transferring the primary user role to an-
other BMW ID.
If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-
signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-
vated.
▷
▷
Change vehicle-wide data protection set-
tings.
Create the main digital key.
Setting synchronization
If synchronization is switched on, settings from
the following areas, for example, are continu-
ously synchronized:
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Automatic driver recognition
If driver recognition has been established, au-
tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-
file is triggered by the following actions:
▷
▷
BMW ID, e.g., profile picture.
Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home
address, or map settings.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-
tions.
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button
on the assigned vehicle key.
iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-
guage, or units.
▷
By unlocking the vehicle with a door handle.
The assigned vehicle key or the assigned
digital key must be carried with you.
Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac-
tivation word.
▷
By automatic unlocking when approaching
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the
assigned digital key must be carried with
you. Depending on the country, it may not
be possible to recognize the digital key.
Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling
and home lights.
Settings from the following areas are only
synchronized when you log in for the first time:
▷
Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s
seat position or temperature setting.
If there are several vehicle keys or digital keys
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the
BMW ID or driver profile is done according to
the following priority:
▷
Data protection menu.
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or
the assigned driver profile.
If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be
recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select
the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome
window.
The guest profile is activated when the ve-
hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-
signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.
▷
If a vehicle key and a digital key are de-
tected at the same time, the digital key trig-
72
Personal settings
CONTROLS
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed
at any time via iDrive:
Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2.
▷
▷
"Manage BMW IDs"
2.
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"
"Change driver profile"
"Change driver profile"
3.
Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or
the desired driver profile.
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.
4. If necessary, enter the PIN.
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes
the vehicle to be removed from the My BMW
App. If the BMW ID has been synchronized
with the BMW Cloud, the data stored in the
BMW Cloud is retained after the BMW ID is
deleted. If the currently active BMW ID is re-
moved, the guest profile is activated.
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,
the stored settings are loaded.
Guest profile
The guest profile can be activated and
changed by anyone.
Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App
removes the corresponding BMW ID from the
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the
BMW Cloud will be retained.
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-
matically active:
▷
A BMW ID has not yet been added or a
driver profile has not yet been created.
If the vehicle is removed from the primary us-
er’s My BMW App, it will also be removed from
the My BMW App of the other users. The cor-
responding BMW IDs are removed from the
vehicle.
▷
No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key
that was used to unlock the vehicle.
The following limitations apply to the guest
profile:
If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, it is
removed from each user’s My BMW App, and
all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.
▷
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,
navigation functions or saving favorites.
▷
▷
The guest profile cannot be renamed.
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the
guest profile.
Transfer of the vehicle key
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or
a driver profile can be used to view or change
the stored personal settings.
▷
▷
It is not possible to assign driver detection
to the guest profile.
In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-
zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-
sons, any assigned driver detection should be
canceled. Changes to the driver detection can
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the
driver profile.
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive:
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to
transfer a digital key to permit other persons
the use of your own vehicle.
2.
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"
"Change driver profile"
Additional information:
3. "Continue as guest"
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
73
Personal settings
CONTROLS
Settings
System limits
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or
the digital key may not always be possible in
the following cases, for example:
General information
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-
ating a driver profile can be changed.
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver
profile are located in the outer area on the
driver's side of the vehicle.
2. "Settings"
The following settings are available for the
BMW ID:
▷
When the vehicle was unlocked via the My
BMW App.
▷
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.
The profile picture.
The use of personal settings that are stored for
a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-
cal limitations. For example, settings may be
stored for a system that is not available, or
available in a non-compatible version, in other
vehicles.
The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.
The personal salutation.
The following settings are available for the
driver profile:
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.
The profile picture.
The profile name.
Selecting a profile picture
The profile picture can be selected from the
predefined profile pictures:
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Settings"
3. "Manage profile picture"
4. "Select profile picture"
The personal profile picture for a BMW ID can
be adopted from the profile in the My BMW
App. This requires that the synchronization
with the BMW Cloud is activated in the set-
tings. After transferring the profile picture from
the My BMW App, you can only select one of
the predefined images if the profile picture in
the My BMW App is deleted or synchronization
is deactivated.
74
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-
picion that a battery or button cell battery has
been swallowed or is located in any part of
the body.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Overview
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Vehicle key
General information
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of
delivery, each containing an integrated key.
Buttons on the vehicle key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-
tery.
Icon
Meaning
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings are possible
for the button functions.
Unlock.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.
Lock.
Pre-conditioning, refer to page 288.
To provide information on maintenance rec-
ommendations, the service data is stored in
the vehicle key.
Open the cargo area.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting
the vehicle.
Panic mode.
Pathway lighting, refer to page 169.
Safety information
Additional vehicle keys
Additional vehicle keys are available from an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Warning
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries
within two hours, for example due to internal
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-
75
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
3. Remove the battery from the battery hous-
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
ing.
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-
file.
Replacing the battery
4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-
tive side facing down.
NOTICE
5. Insert the battery housing into the vehicle
key.
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-
vice can damage the device. There is a risk
of property damage. Always replace the dis-
charged battery with a battery with the same
voltage, the same size and the same specifi-
cation.
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-
move it from the side.
6. Insert the cover into the vehicle key.
Have old batteries disposed of by an
authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop,
or take them to a collection point.
Batteries contain harmful chemicals. It
is prohibited by law to dispose of bat-
teries together with household waste.
2. Remove the battery housing from the vehi-
cle key to the side.
Integrated key
General information
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked man-
ually using the integrated key.
Depending on the national-market version, the
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-
ment.
76
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Safety information
Unlocking the vehicle manually
1. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-
ward with one hand.
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
2. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key
by turning it counterclockwise.
Removing the integrated key
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, and
push the cover, arrow 2, forward and re-
move it from the side.
3. Pull out the vehicle key and release the
door handle.
4. Open the driver's door.
5. Press the central locking button to unlock
the other doors.
2. Slide out the integrated key at the open
side of the vehicle key.
With the vehicle de-energized: pull the door
opener of the other doors from the inside.
Locking the vehicle manually
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.
Locking the vehicle
1. Close all doors.
3. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
key.
2. Enter the vehicle on the front passenger's
side and close the front passenger door.
77
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
3. Press the central locking button to unlock
all doors.
3. Lock the door lock using the integrated key,
turning it clockwise. Turn the key approx.
50°, beyond the resistance point, to the
stop.
4. Exit the vehicle through the front passenger
door.
5. With the integrated key, close and lock the
front passenger door using the side door
lock.
4. Pull out the vehicle key and release the
door handle.
5. Close the driver's door.
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.
If vehicle is de-energized:
Alarm system
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.
1. With the integrated key, close and lock all
doors, except the driver's door, using the
side door lock.
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency
detection to switch off the alarm.
If the doors are manually locked from the in-
side, the alarm system is not activated.
Emergency detection of the vehicle
key
2. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-
ward with one hand.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.
78
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Proceed as follows in this case:
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready
state.
1. To turn on drive-ready state via emergency
detection of the vehicle key, hold the back
of the vehicle key to the marking on the
steering column. Pay attention to the dis-
play in the instrument cluster.
Access to vehicle interior
Safety information
Warning
2.
▷
If the vehicle key is detected:
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds.
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
▷
If the vehicle key is not detected:
Slightly change the position of the vehi-
cle key and repeat the procedure.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key together
with metal objects.
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
ity to the vehicle key.
Warning
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-
imity to other electronic devices.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity
of the wireless charging tray.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
Place the vehicle key in a different location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
79
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
▷
▷
The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers
are switched on.
Actions during unlocking
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-
cle:
The following functions are executed:
▷
All doors, the cargo area, and the fuel filler
flap are locked.
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched on. This
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-
ing the lock buttons or the door openers.
▷
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle
will be unlocked.
▷
The alarm system is switched on.
▷
▷
The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk
twice. In this case, drive-ready state must be
turned off using the Start/Stop button.
The welcome light can be turned on when
the vehicle is being unlocked.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 92.
▷
If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver
profile will be activated.
With the vehicle key
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in
exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using
the button inside the vehicle, they will not
fold out when the vehicle is unlocked.
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have
been unlocked due to the settings in place,
press the button on the vehicle key again to
unlock the other vehicle access points.
▷
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched off.
The alarm system is switched off.
The lighting functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
Settings, refer to page 92.
Locking the vehicle
1. Close the driver's door.
Welcome lights, refer to page 169.
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 70.
2.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Actions during locking
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:
All vehicle access points are locked.
80
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Locking the vehicle
1. Close the driver's door.
On the door handle
Principle
2. Touch the grooved surface on the door
handle of a closed front door with your fin-
ger for approx. 1 second without reaching
into the recessed grip.
The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Depending on national-market version, the ve-
hicle can also be unlocked and locked via the
door handle using a compatible smartphone
and digital key.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Malfunction
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-
ing request detection on the door handles.
Functional requirements
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key
or use the integrated key.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to unlock and lock using the digital
key.
Touchless unlocking/locking of the
vehicle
▷
▷
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
outside of the vehicle near the doors.
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must
elapse before unlocking is possible.
Principle
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.
Unlock vehicle
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be
locked.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking
zone.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear
of the vehicle.
Reach into the recessed grip of a front door.
81
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key
leaves the locking zone.
will only be available after the vehicle has
been driven.
The locking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of
the vehicle.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 92.
Depending on the national-market version,
touchless unlocking and locking is also possi-
ble for compatible smartphones with a digital
key. Enable Bluetooth on your smartphone to
do so.
With the Key Card
Principle
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used
to unlock and lock the vehicle.
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking
zone for an extended period of time without
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-
cally.
Additional information:
Key Card, refer to page 87.
If someone is detected on a seat while locking
the vehicle, the following restrictions apply:
General information
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
▷
The vehicle will be locked but not secured
against theft.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Actions during unlocking
If the settings specify that only the driver's
door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked,
note the following:
The driver's door and fuel filler flap will only
unlock when the driver is within the driver's
door unlocking zone.
Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-
ter of the driver's door handle.
Settings, refer to page 92.
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,
make sure that all doors and the cargo area
are closed.
Functional requirements
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change
the position of the Key Card and repeat the
procedure.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone for contactless unlocking and locking
using the digital key.
With the BMW Digital Key
▷
Automatic unlocking and locking must be
activated in the settings.
Principle
▷
▷
The drive-ready state must be turned off.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, a digital key can be installed
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
several days, contactless unlocking/locking
82
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-
lock and lock the vehicle.
Access to the cargo area
Additional information:
General information
It may not be possible to open the cargo area
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle
Additional information:
Valet parking mode, refer to page 92.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
clear while opening and closing.
Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at
the center of the driver's door handle. The po-
sition of the near field communication antenna
depends on the smartphone model.
Warning
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
make sure that all doors and the cargo area
are closed.
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of prop-
erty damage. Make sure that the travel path
of the trunk lid is clear while opening and
closing.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in
the vehicle key?
With the vehicle key
▷
The app’s remote services offer the option
to lock and unlock a vehicle.
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
This requires an active BMW Connected-
Drive contract, and the app must be instal-
led on a smartphone.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the following settings can be
changed:
▷
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
▷
Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle
key also unlocks the doors.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
▷
Before unlocking the cargo area with the
vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.
Functional requirements
Selector lever position P must be engaged to
open the cargo area with the vehicle key.
83
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
You must enable the setting for opening with
the vehicle key.
▷
▷
Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-
ton on the cargo area.
Additional information:
With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
with you and press the button on the cargo
area.
Settings, refer to page 92.
Locked doors are not unlocked.
Opening the cargo area
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key for approx. 1 second.
Closing the cargo area manually
Pull down the cargo area using the recessed
grips.
On the cargo area
Depending on the equipment: press
the button on the cargo area.
General information
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be
accessed without activating the vehicle key.
The vehicle is locked after closing the
cargo area. To do so, the driver's door must be
closed and the vehicle key must be outside of
the vehicle near the cargo area.
The key is automatically detected near the ve-
hicle.
Depending on the national-market version,
compatible smartphones with a digital key are
also detected automatically. In this case, the
cargo area can be opened with a smartphone.
Closing the cargo area automatically
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Functional prerequisites
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to detect the digital key.
▷
▷
Press the button on the trunk.
Press the button on the trunk.
Opening the cargo area
The vehicle is locked after closing
the cargo area. To do so, the driv-
er's door must be closed and the vehicle
key must be outside of the vehicle near the
cargo area.
▷
Pull the trunk lid down slightly. The trunk lid
closes automatically.
84
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-
ment.
Inside the vehicle
Functional requirements
The vehicle key or digital key must be located
within the vehicle in order to close the cargo
area using the button inside the vehicle.
By pressing the button on the outside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the
cargo area again.
▷
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the
cargo area again.
Opening the trunk
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
Pressing it again opens the cargo area
again.
Press the button in the driver's door.
By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the
closing motion.
Closing the cargo area
Depending on the equipment:
Pull and hold the button in the driver's
door.
Opening and closing the cargo area
contactlessly
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk is
closed.
Principle
You can open the cargo area contactlessly
when carrying the vehicle key on your person.
With automatic tailgate activation, the cargo
area can also be closed contactlessly.
Interruption of the opening
procedure
The opening procedure is interrupted in the
following situations:
Sensors detect specific foot movements near
the center of the rear area, and the cargo area
opens or closes.
▷
▷
When the vehicle starts moving.
By pressing the button on the outside of
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
cargo area again.
General information
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market version.
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of the
cargo area. Pressing it again closes the
cargo area again.
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the
cargo area may open or close inadvertently if
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot
movement is detected.
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
Pressing the button again continues the
opening process.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.
▷
By pressing or pulling the button in the
driver's door. Pressing again continues the
opening procedure.
If contactless opening is used for the cargo
area, the locked doors will not be unlocked.
Additional information:
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-
lowing situations:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
85
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
ately. During these movements, the leg
must pass through the range of the sensor.
Safety information
Warning
With hands-free opening of the cargo area,
there may be unintentional contact with vehi-
cle parts, e.g., hot exhaust system. There is
a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make
sure you have a firm stance and do not touch
the vehicle.
Functional requirements
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard warn-
ing system flashes.
▷
To close the cargo area contactlessly, the
automatic tailgate must be installed.
Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc-
cedure. The subsequent foot movement will
close the cargo area again.
▷
▷
Selector lever position P must be engaged.
Contactless opening and closing of the
cargo area must be activated in the set-
tings.
Closing the cargo area
Perform the foot movement for opening the
cargo area.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to open and close the cargo area
contactlessly using the digital key.
The hazard warning system flashes and an
acoustic signal sounds.
Depending on vehicle equipment:
Moving a foot again will stop the closing proc-
ess. The subsequent foot movement will open
the cargo area again.
▷
The trailer power socket must be unoccu-
pied.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 92.
System limits
The detection of the foot movement may be
limited due to the following external conditions:
Opening the cargo area
1. To open the cargo area hands-free, walk
behind the vehicle and hold the vehicle key
in the middle at approx. arm’s length.
▷
▷
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.
Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by
stickers.
2. Move your foot under the vehicle in the
driving direction and pull it back immedi-
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
Movement in range of the sensors may cause
the cargo area to open or close unintentionally,
e.g., when objects are lifted quickly in the vehi-
cle rear or due to the moving brushes in a car
wash. To prevent such unintended opening of
the cargo area in such cases, keep the vehicle
key at a sufficient distance from the rear of the
vehicle.
86
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Depending on vehicle equipment: Objects
mounted on a trailer hitch cannot be detected
if the trailer power socket is not plugged in.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
wireless charging tray at the same time, the
Key Card could become damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Do not place the
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the
same time as a mobile device.
Emergency cargo area release
Activating/deactivating Key Card in
the vehicle
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The cargo area is unlocked.
General information
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the
vehicle key.
Malfunction
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper-
ate the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow
and smooth motion.
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Functional requirement
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
activate and deactivate the Key Card.
To close it completely, push the trunk lid down
lightly. Closing occurs automatically.
Activating Key Card
Key Card
Principle
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked
and locked, as well as started.
General information
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market version.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The
digital key must be activated via iDrive.
1. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-
phone tray.
2. Follow instructions on the control display.
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key
Card or take the Key Card with you because
the active Key Card can be used to start the
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to
a service appointment.
Deactivating Key Card
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
87
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
General information
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality
depend on vehicle equipment and national-
market version.
5. "Key Card"
6. "Deactivate Key Card"
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile
devices.
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, this function must be offered by
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW
app can be used to check if the smartphone
and vehicle are compatible and which func-
tions are supported.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with
the activated Key Card.
Additional information:
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 79.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual
settings can be assigned to a digital key.
Turning on the drive-ready state
When using a smartphone as a digital key, it is
helpful to carry the deactivated Key Card in the
vehicle. In situations where the vehicle is to be
given to another person, they can be given the
Key Card instead of the smartphone. To do so,
the Key Card must be activated via iDrive.
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-
ice appointment.
Additional information:
1. Place activated Key Card in the center of
the smartphone tray.
▷
▷
▷
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 70.
Key Card, refer to page 87.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key
Card can be removed from the tray.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW
Digital Key
Malfunction
The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key
Card if there are objects between the smart-
phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or
smartphone case.
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-
Drive account of the vehicle owner.
The rechargeable battery of the smart-
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable
battery depends on the smartphone.
BMW Digital Key
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone for contactless unlocking and locking
using the digital key.
Principle
BMW Digital Key lets you lock and unlock and
start your vehicle using a digital key.
88
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Authentication
Enabling the main digital key
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone
model, an authentication may be required for
security and safety reasons.
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-
hicle for this purpose.
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key
or another method may be used for authenti-
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions
on the smartphone or the control display.
Proof of authorization can be started via the
My BMW App or using the activation code in
the corresponding smartphone function, e.g.,
the Wallet app.
Deleting digital keys
Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehi-
cle to be enabled.
General information
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the
list of enabled digital keys.
Follow the activation instructions in the Digital
Key menu, on the app, or on the control dis-
play.
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
Sharing digital keys
Deleting the main digital key
The main digital key can be deleted from the
smartphone or via iDrive.
General information
Digital Key allows the sharing of digital keys
with other people. This option is available via
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital
key. This function must be supported by the
smartphone.
The deletion of the main digital key is com-
pleted immediately.
Deleting a shared key
Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-
phone with the master Digital Key, using the
smartphone with the shared key to be deleted,
or via iDrive.
Forwarding authorization
To share the digital key, select the correspond-
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in
the Wallet app.
The deletion via the smartphone using the
main digital key will not be performed until the
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to
be deleted.
As soon as a digital key is shared with another
person, the person will receive an invitation.
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.
If the smartphone associated with a shared
key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it
will be deleted immediately.
Limiting the range of functions
Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-
ited before handing it over. For instance, if the
digital key is passed on to a novice driver, the
switch-off for driving stability control systems
can be disabled and the engine power can
be reduced. For more information, refer to the
ConnectedDrive Portal and My BMW app.
Deletion via iDrive
To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be
an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the
master Digital Key must be in the smartphone
tray.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
89
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
Turning on the drive-ready state
Using the smartphone tray
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. Delete the Digital Key.
Resetting the function
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-
hicle.
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,
all digital keys including the main digital key
will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is
retained and deactivated.
1. Place smartphone in the center of the
smartphone tray.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
2. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on
drive-ready state.
The main digital key must be enabled again to
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
1.
Apps menu
Inside the vehicle
2. "Vehicle"
With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, depending
on the country, for the smartphone with Blue-
tooth enabled to be located inside the vehicle.
Press the Start/Stop button to turn on drive-
ready state.
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
5. "Reset function"
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as fol-
lows:
Sale of the smartphone
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that
the smartphone can no longer be used for the
vehicle.
▷
▷
Using the door handle.
With Comfort Access: depending on the na-
tional-market version, the vehicle can be
locked and unlocked with no-touch activa-
tion.
Changing smartphones
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital
Key, activate the new smartphone according to
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The
previous master key is deleted when the new
smartphone is activated.
BMW Digital Key availability and function-
ality depend on vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version.
Additional information:
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 79.
Sale of the vehicle
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital
Key function or remove the vehicle from the
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle
owner.
90
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-
Overview
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key
is retained and deactivated.
System limits
With a digital key, the alarm system's interior
motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor can only
be deactivated using the control display.
Additional information:
Alarm system, refer to page 94.
The central locking buttons are located on the
front door.
Malfunction
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
Lock.
Unlock.
▷
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover
that is not suitable.
Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card
are located between the smartphone and
the smartphone cover.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button in the driver's door
or front passengers door with the front
doors closed.
Fault of the connection from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Shielding of the smartphone due to build-
ings or metal objects.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking the vehicle
Buttons for the central
locking system
Press the button in the driver's door or
front passenger’s door.
General information
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-
ing off.
Opening the door
▷
Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights are illuminated.
Pull the door opener above the arm-
rest.
▷
▷
Front doors: pull the door opener on the
door to open the door. The other doors re-
main locked.
Back doors: pull twice on the door opener
on the door to be opened; the first time
91
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
unlocks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
3. "System settings"
4. "Valet parking mode"
5. "Lock tailgate"
The cargo area is locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
Valet parking mode
6. If necessary, "PIN"
Principle
If the active BMW ID does not have an as-
signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The
PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-
ing mode.
In the valet parking mode, the control display is
disabled.
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle
is handed over for valet parking.
7. If necessary, enter the PIN.
8. "Activate valet parking mode"
General information
Depending on the national-market version, the
valet parking mode may not be available.
Deactivating valet parking mode
1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock
screen.
Valet Parking mode has the following restric-
tions:
2.
▷
Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.
▷
Vehicle settings cannot be changed via
iDrive.
If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the
access data for the BMW ID.
▷
Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest pro-
file cannot be changed.
▷
If the selected BMW ID does not have
an assigned PIN: enter the access data
for the BMW ID.
▷
▷
Personal data cannot be displayed.
The audio system is muted, with the possi-
ble volume of the audio system being lim-
ited.
Settings
▷
▷
▷
The integrated Universal Remote Control is
deactivated.
General information
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings for opening
and closing are possible.
Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned
off.
The availability of certain settings of the
driving modes is limited.
Additional information:
Unlocking and locking
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 70.
Doors
1.
Functional requirement
Apps menu
The driver has registered in the vehicle with a
BMW ID.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
Activating the valet parking mode
5. "Unlock"
1.
Apps menu
6. Select the desired setting:
2. "Vehicle"
92
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
"Driver's door only"
3. "Doors and windows"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-
locks the entire vehicle.
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷
▷
▷
"Flash when unlocking"
"All doors"
Unlocking is confirmed by two flashes.
"Flash when locking"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Locking is confirmed by one flash.
With alarm system:
Touchless unlocking/locking
1.
Apps menu
"Sound on lock/unlock"
2. "Vehicle"
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Comfort access"
5. Select the desired setting.
Folding mirrors in automatically
Automatic unlocking
1.
Apps menu
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷
▷
"Unlock doors at end of trip"
"Unlock doors when in P"
Cargo area
Cargo area and doors
If locked, the vehicle unlocks automatically
when drive-ready state is turned off or selector
lever position P is engaged.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Tailgate"
Automatic locking
1.
Apps menu
5. Select the desired setting:
2. "Vehicle"
▷
"Tailgate"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
Depending on the equipment, the cargo
area will be unlocked or opened.
5. "Lock after a short time"
▷
"Tailgate and door(s)"
The vehicle locks automatically after a short
period of time if no door is opened after un-
locking.
Depending on the equipment, the cargo
area will be unlocked or opened and the
doors are unlocked.
▷
"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is
already unlocked"
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
93
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The vehicle must be unlocked before
the cargo area can be operated with the
vehicle key.
▷
Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo
area.
▷
▷
Movements in the vehicle interior.
▷
"Lock tailgate button"
Changes in the vehicle inclination such as
during attempts at stealing a wheel or
when towing the vehicle.
Operating the cargo area with the vehi-
cle key is disabled.
▷
▷
Disconnected battery voltage.
Opening/closing the cargo area
contactlessly
Improper use of the socket for OBD on-
board diagnostics.
1.
Apps menu
▷
Locking the vehicle while a device is con-
nected to the diagnostic socket.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Tailgate"
The alarm system signals these changes visu-
ally and acoustically:
▷
Acoustic alarm:
5. Select the desired setting.
Depending on local regulations, the acous-
tic alarm may be suppressed.
Closing the sun protection
automatically
▷
Optical alarm:
Vehicles with fixed glass sunroof:
By flashing of the hazard warning system
and headlights, where required.
It is possible to configure whether the roller
sunblind closes automatically when the vehicle
is locked.
Do not modify the system to ensure function of
the alarm system.
1.
Apps menu
Turning the alarm system on/off
The alarm system is turned on as soon as the
vehicle is locked from the outside.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Close roof blind automatically"
5. Select the desired setting.
The alarm system does not turn on if the vehi-
cle is locked manually from the inside.
The alarm system is switched off as soon as
the vehicle is unlocked.
Alarm system
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door
is opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Principle
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic
signal when someone attempts to open the
locked vehicle incorrectly.
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
Opening the cargo area with the
alarm system switched on
The cargo area can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
94
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will
be locked and monitored again. The hazard
warning system flashes once during closing.
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷
The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until drive-ready state is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
The alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-
cle is towed.
▷
Briefly press the button on the vehi-
cle key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Interior motion sensor
The vehicle interior is monitored.
Indicator light on the interior mirror
The alarm system triggers when movement is
detected inside the vehicle.
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-
thorized action occurred.
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
The indicator light flashes for approx.
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
▷
▷
▷
In car washes.
In duplex garages.
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer.
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
▷
▷
With animals in the vehicle.
When the vehicle is locked after start of re-
fueling.
When the remaining open access points
are closed, the interior motion sensor and
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes even though all
access points have been closed:
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Alarm system error.
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key
within 30 seconds as soon as the
vehicle is locked.
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
95
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The indicator light illuminates for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
With the vehicle key
▷
After turning off the standby state, an
option to turn off the interior motion sensor
and the tilt alarm sensor will be displayed
on the control display.
Opening windows
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
The windows open for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
Closing the windows
Ending the alarm
Unlock the vehicle.
With Comfort Access: press and hold
the button on the vehicle key after lock-
ing.
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently
be turned on via the emergency detection of
the vehicle key.
The windows close for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
Window
General information
When a window is frequently opened to the
same position, this task can be performed by
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is
useful if you frequently use the same parking
garage, for example.
On the door handle
Principle
The windows can be closed using the door
handle without operating the vehicle key.
Additional information:
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 55.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Safety information
Depending on national-market version, the
windows can also be closed via the door han-
dle using a compatible smartphone and digital
key.
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
jury and risk of property damage. Make sure
that the travel path of the windows is clear
while opening and closing.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
96
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Functional prerequisites
Functional requirements
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance
in your pants pocket.
▷
Standby state is switched on.
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to close the window(s) using the dig-
ital key.
The vehicle key or digital key must be inside
the vehicle.
Opening windows
Closing the windows
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch
is being held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Closing the windows
Touch the grooved surface on the door handle
of a closed front door with your finger and hold
it there without grasping the recessed grip.
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch
is being held.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
The window closes automatically.
Pulling again stops the motion.
Anti-trap mechanism
Inside the vehicle
Principle
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or
body parts becoming jammed between the
door frame and window while a window is be-
ing closed.
Overview
General information
If resistance or blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing will be in-
terrupted.
Power windows
97
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Safety information
NOTICE
When operating the roller sunblind, objects
stored on the rear shelf may damage the
roller sunblind. There is a risk of property
damage. Make sure that the area of move-
ment of the roller sunblind is clear during the
operation.
Warning
Accessories on the windows such as anten-
nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There
is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in
the area of movement of the windows.
Closing without the anti-trap
mechanism
Overview
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Pull the
switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited anti-trap
mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
Rear window roller blind button.
2. Pull the
switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
Operating the side roller blinds
Pull out the side roller sunblind using the loop
and hook it onto the holder.
The window closes without the anti-trap
mechanism.
Operating the rear roller blind
Window roller sunblinds
Safety information
Warning
On the driver’s door
Press the button on the driver's door to
open the rear roller blind if closed or to
close the rear roller blind if open.
If the button is pressed again while moving,
the rear roller blind moves in the opposite di-
rection.
With closed roller sunblinds and open win-
dows, the roller sunblinds may be strained
while driving due to the air stream. The roller
sunblinds may be damaged and vehicle oc-
cupants may be harmed. There is a risk of
injury. Do not open the windows while driving
if the roller sunblinds are closed.
System limits
If you can no longer move the rear roller blind
after pressing the button several times, the
overheating protection has activated. The sys-
98
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
tem is disabled for a limited time to prevent
overheating. Let the system cool down.
Sliding glass roof
Safety information
Safety switch
Warning
Principle
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and
closing.
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil-
dren, for instance, from opening and closing
the rear windows using the switches in the
rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
With the vehicle key
Overview
Opening glass sunroof
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking.
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be
opened for as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Closing glass sunroof
With Comfort Access: press and hold
the button on the vehicle key in close
range of the vehicle after locking.
The safety switch is located on the
driver's door.
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be
closed for as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Turning the safety functions on/off
To activate/deactivate the safety func-
tion, press the safety switch on the
driver’s door.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
The LED in the button illuminates when the
safety function is switched on.
On the door handle
Principle
The glass sunroof can be closed using the
door handle without operating the vehicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
99
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
Standby state is switched on.
General information
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.
The function is available with Comfort Access.
The vehicle key must be inside the vehicle.
Depending on the country, the glass sunroof
can also be closed at the external door handle
using compatible smartphones with digital key.
General information
Additional information:
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are
operated using the same switch.
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Overview
Functional prerequisites
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance
in your pants pocket.
Button in the vehicle
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to close the glass sunroof using the
digital key.
Closing glass sunroof
Opening/closing the glass sun-
roof/sun protection.
Touch the grooved surface on the external
door handle of a closed front door with your
finger and hold it there without grasping the
recessed grip.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷
The closed glass sunroof tilts
and the sun protection opens
slightly.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
▷
The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sun protection
does not move.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
▷
The tilted glass sunroof closes.
Inside the vehicle
Functional requirements
The glass sunroof and sun protection can be
operated under the following conditions.
100
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sun protection separately
▷
Briefly press out the switch twice in succes-
sion toward the front past the resistance
point.
▷
Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
Holding down the switch
opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already
fully open, the glass sunroof
opens.
The glass sunroof and sun protection close
together.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
▷
▷
Slide switch forward to the resistance point
and hold.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is
not fully open. In these models, the automatic
function initially only opens the glass sunroof
up to this comfort position.
The glass sunroof closes while the switch
is being held. If the glass sunroof is already
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro-
tection closes.
Slide the switch back past the resistance
point.
Operating the switch inside the vehicle again
opens the glass sunroof completely.
The sun protection opens automatically. If
the sun protection is already fully open, the
glass sunroof opens automatically.
Anti-trap mechanism
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Principle
▷
Push the switch forward past the resistance
point.
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or
body parts from becoming jammed between
the roof frame and glass sunroof while the
glass sunroof is closing.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in
the tilted position, the sun protection closes
automatically.
General information
If a resistance or blockage is detected while
the glass sunroof is closing, the closing opera-
tion is interrupted once the roof reaches the
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos-
ing from the tilted position.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sun protection together
▷
Briefly press out the switch
twice in succession toward
the rear past the resistance
point.
Closing from the open position without
the anti-trap mechanism
If an external hazard or ice prevents normal
closure, proceed as follows:
The glass sunroof and sun
protection open together.
101
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
1. Close all doors.
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-
ing vehicle.
▷
The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-
alization is completed.
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
▷
▷
The drive-ready state is established.
The outside temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
The glass sunroof closes with limited anti-
trap mechanism. If the closing force ex-
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is inter-
rupted.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without the anti-trap mechanism.
4. Push the switch forward again past the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without the anti-trap mech-
anism. Make sure that the closing path is
clear.
Make sure that the closing path is clear.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold
it until the initialization is com-
plete:
Closing from the lifted position without
the anti-trap mechanism
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
▷
▷
▷
If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
The sun protection is initialized in the
closed position.
Initialization is complete once the glass sun-
roof and the sun protection have opened then
closed again.
1. Close all doors.
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-
ing vehicle.
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
Fixed glass roof
Initializing after a power interruption
General
The glass sunroof sun protection can be
opened or closed.
General information
After a power interruption during the opening
or closing process, the glass sunroof can only
be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the
system can help in this case.
The sun protection opens from rear to front.
With the vehicle key
The system can be initialized under the follow-
ing conditions:
Opening the sun protection
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking.
102
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The glass sunroof sun protection is opened
as long as the button on the vehicle key is
pressed.
Closing the sun protection
Closing the sun protection
With Comfort Access: press and hold
the button on the vehicle key in close
range of the vehicle after locking.
The glass sunroof sun protection is closed
as long as the button on the vehicle key is
pressed.
Touch the grooved surface on the door handle
of a closed front door with your finger and hold
it there without grasping the recessed grip.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
Besides locking the vehicle, the windows and
sun protection will be closed and locked.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
On the door handle
Principle
The sun protection can be closed using the
door handle without operating the vehicle key.
Inside the vehicle
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
Functional requirements
The sun protection can be operated under the
following conditions:
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
Depending on the country, the sun protection
can also be closed with the door handle using
a compatible smartphone and a digital key.
The vehicle key must be inside the vehicle.
Button in the headliner
Overview
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Functional prerequisites
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance
in your pants pocket.
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-
phone to close the sun protection using the
digital key.
103
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Opening/closing the sun protec-
tion.
Closing the sun protection
automatically
The sun protection closes automatically when
the vehicle is locked.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the sun protec-
tion moves to its last position.
Operation
This function can be deactivated in the set-
tings, depending on vehicle equipment.
▷
Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
Additional information:
The sun protection is closed
as long as the switch is held
down.
Settings, refer to page 92.
Initializing after a power interruption
▷
▷
Slide switch forward to the resistance point
and hold.
General information
Holding down the switch opens the sun
protection.
If the power is interrupted while opening or
closing, the sun protection can only be oper-
ated to a limited extent. Initializing the system
can help in this case.
Slide the switch back past the resistance
point.
The sun protection closes automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
The system can be initialized under the follow-
ing conditions:
▷
Push the switch forward past the resistance
point.
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
The sun protection opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-
alization is completed.
The drive-ready state is established.
Push switch up.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without the anti-trap mechanism.
The sun protection moves to a
defined position to provide par-
tial shading.
Make sure that the closing path is clear.
Pressing the switch again closes
the sun protection.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold
it until the initialization is com-
plete:
Control display
Operation
1.
Apps menu
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
2. "Vehicle"
▷
If the sun protection is closed, it opens then
closes again.
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Sun blinds"
▷
If the sun protection is open, it closes first,
then opens and closes again.
5. Select the desired function.
104
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Initialization is complete once the sun protec-
tion has opened then closed again.
105
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Vehicle features and options
Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
the protective effect of the seat belt can no
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest
so that it is in the most upright position as
possible and do not adjust again while driv-
ing.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Sitting safely
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-
ment.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat
position plays an important role. Follow the in-
formation in the following chapters.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 106.
Semi-electrically adjustable seats
Seat belts, refer to page 110.
Head restraints, refer to page 113.
Airbags, refer to page 176.
Overview
Seats
Safety information
Warning
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Only adjust the
seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is
stationary.
The lever and switches for adjusting the seats
are located on the front seats.
106
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Setting the longitudinal direction
Adjusting seat tilt
Warning
If a seat is not locked, it may move unexpect-
edly while driving. Vehicle control could be
lost. There is a risk of accident, injury, and
property damage. After adjusting, move the
seat forward or back slightly, making sure the
seat engages properly.
Tilt switch up or down.
Adjusting backrest tilt
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
Adjusting the height
Tilt switch forward or backward.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function.
Overview
Press switch up or down.
The switches for setting the seats are located
on the front seats.
107
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Seat settings menu
Adjusting seat tilt
The seat adjustment menu button is located
on the front door.
Tilt switch up or down.
Adjusting backrest tilt
Press the button to go directly to the
seat settings menu on the control dis-
play.
Setting the longitudinal direction
Tilt switch forward or backward.
Adjusting the seat position
automatically
Press switch forward or backward.
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is
reactivated at a later time, the saved position
will be called up automatically.
Adjusting the height
Activate/deactivate the function
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select driver’s seat.
5. "Use automatically"
6. Select the desired setting.
Press switch up or down.
108
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Functional limitation
Thigh support
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar
support at very high and very low tempera-
tures.
Sport seat
Backrest width
Principle
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side
support when cornering.
General information
The backrest width is changed by adjusting
the side sections of the backrest.
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push
the thigh support forward or back.
When exiting the vehicle, the backrest width
opens completely. The last set position is au-
tomatically applied before you start driving.
Multifunctional seat
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Adjusting the backrest width
3. "Seat comfort"
1.
Apps menu
4. Select desired seat.
5. Select the desired function.
6. Select the desired setting.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. Select the desired function.
6. Select the desired setting.
Lumbar support
Principle
Calibrating the front seats
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright sitting position.
General information
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer
functions precisely, a Check Control message
is displayed on the control display.
Adjusting the lumbar support
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.
▷
Press the front/rear section of the
button:
The curvature is increased/de-
creased.
▷
Press the upper/lower section of the but-
ton:
The curvature is shifted up/down.
109
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Safety information
Activating/deactivating the setting
1.
Apps menu
Warning
2. "Vehicle"
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-
ment.
3. "Seat comfort"
4. "Comfort exit"
5. Select the desired setting.
Seat belts
Calibrating the front seat
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-
ward for approx. 2 seconds until the seat
stops.
General information
The vehicle is fitted with five seat belts to en-
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
2. Repeat step 1 until the seat stops then
moves slightly forward.
Always make sure that seat belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-
place seat belts.
3. Press the switch forward for approx. 2 sec-
onds again until the seat stops.
4. Repeat step 3 until the seat stops then
moves slightly backward.
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to
achieve the best possible protective effect for
the seat belts when used properly and with the
correct seat settings.
As soon as the message on the control dis-
play disappears, the calibration is complete.
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-
bration.
The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear
seats are intended for the persons sitting on
the left and right.
If the message is still shown after repeated
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
The center seat belt buckle of the rear seats is
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
Additional information:
Comfort exit
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 106.
Principle
Safety information
The seat position can be adjusted automati-
cally to make it easier to get in and out of the
vehicle.
Warning
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of
the seat belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Do not strap in more than one person per
single seat belt. Infants and children are not
allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be
General information
▷
The backrest width completely opens tem-
porarily.
▷
The seat moves back.
110
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
transported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
Correct use of seat belts
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The seat belt must not press on
your stomach.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.
▷
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard
or fragile objects.
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward
around your upper body area.
Buckling the seat belt
1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder
and hip to put it on.
Warning
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,
the protective effect of the middle seat belt
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. If you are using the middle seat
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage
audibly.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail
in the following situations:
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any
other way.
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
position the buckle when not in use.
▷
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders
were modified.
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do
not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat
belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat
belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat
belts checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Unbuckling the seat belt
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt
winder.
111
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the
following situations:
Middle seat belt in the rear
Buckling the seat belt
▷
▷
▷
When the seat belt on the driver's side or
on the passenger's side is not fastened.
When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-
ing.
When objects are lying on a seat.
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-
minates after turning on the drive-ready state
when the seat belt reminder is active.
1. Release buckle tongue from the fixture on
the rear shelf.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has
been fastened correctly.
2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt
lock, arrow 1.
Icon
Meaning
3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the seat
belt buckle, arrow 2.
Seat belt on the driver's seat is
not buckled.
The seat belt buckles must engage audibly.
Seat belt on the passenger
seat or another seat in the ve-
hicle is not buckled.
Unbuckling the seat belt
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-
responding seat.
3. Open the belt lock, arrow 2, with the buckle
tongue, arrow 1.
Seat belt is not buckled on the
corresponding seat.
Rear Occupant Alert
Principle
At the end of a trip, the system informs the
driver of the possible presence of occupants on
the rear seats.
4. Guide the seat belt to the fixture on the rear
shelf.
General information
Seat belt reminder
If a door with access to the rear seat row is
operated within 30 minutes before starting a
drive, a notice appears on the control display
and a signal tone sounds at the end of the
drive.
General information
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned
correctly.
112
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
If the drive is continued within 30 minutes, the
notice is displayed again after the drive is com-
plete.
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Activate/deactivate the function
For manually adjustable head restraints:
After adjusting, make sure that the head
restraint is correctly engaged.
1.
Apps menu
2. "System settings"
3. "Rear Occupant Alert"
4. Select the desired setting.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Safety mode
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver
and front passenger seat belt straps are auto-
matically tightened once after driving off, if the
seat belt is fastened.
If necessary, in critical driving situations, e.g.,
during emergency braking, the front seat belts
are automatically pretensioned.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
After a critical driving situation without an acci-
dent, the front seat belts are loosened again. If
the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat belt us-
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
seat belt before continuing to drive.
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
Front head restraints
Safety information
Warning
Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷
Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
Press the button and push the head restraint
up or down.
113
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
Adjusting the height: Electric head
restraints
Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
For manually adjustable head restraints:
After adjusting, make sure that the head
restraint is correctly engaged.
Press switch up or down.
Adjusting the distance
Warning
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Press the button and push the head restraint
forward or backward.
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
Removing the head restraints
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
114
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to page 307.
Adjusting the height of the outer
head restraints
2. Raise the head restraint up against the re-
sistance.
3. Insert the integrated key.
Integrated key, refer to page 75.
▷
▷
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
To raise: push the head restraint up.
4. Press and hold the integrated key and the
button at the same time, arrows 1, and pull
out the head restraint completely.
Adjusting the height of the center
head restraint
To improve your view to the rear, you can ad-
just the center head restraint so that it is fully
down. Set it to the lowest position only if no
one will be sitting in the center seat.
▷
▷
To lower: press the buttons, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
To raise: push the head restraint up.
Removing the outer head restraint
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest in ques-
tion.
115
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Removing the center head restraint
Safety information
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the center seat.
Warning
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re-
sistance.
Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-
pear. The distance to the road users behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Estimate
the distance to the traffic behind by looking
over your shoulder.
2. Press the buttons, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Overview
Installing the head restraints
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Icon
Meaning
Exterior mirrors
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
General information
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated
at a later time, the stored position is called up
automatically.
Select left exterior mirror, Automatic
Curb Monitor.
Select right exterior mirror.
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be
stored using the memory function.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver's
side exterior mirror also dims automatically.
Photocells in the interior mirror are used to
control this.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Press the button.
The selected exterior mirror moves
along with the button movement.
Depending on vehicle equipment, both exterior
mirrors are heated automatically as necessary
and when drive-ready state is on.
116
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Selecting the exterior mirror
Automatic dimming
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
▷
Press the button to select the left
exterior mirror. The LED illuminates.
▷
Press the button to select the right
exterior mirror. The LED illuminates.
Automatic Curb Monitor
Principle
Malfunction
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the
mirror glass.
Folding in/folding out the exterior
mirrors
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor
1.
Press the button. The LED illumi-
NOTICE
nates.
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in car washes. There is a
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating the Automatic Curb
Monitor
Press the button. The LED illuminates
and the LED of the driver’s side outside
mirror goes out.
Press the button.
Folding is possible at vehicle speeds of up to
approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-
ful in the following situations:
▷
▷
In car washes.
On narrow roads.
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded
out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Photocells are used for control:
▷
▷
In the mirror glass.
On the rear of the mirror.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
as needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
117
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Overview
Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel
forward/back position and height to the seat
position.
Functional requirements
▷
Keep the photocells clean.
▷
Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Manual steering wheel adjustment
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-
age. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehi-
cle is stationary only.
1. Fold the lever down completely.
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands
and move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seat posi-
tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Electric steering wheel adjustment
General information
Memory function
The steering wheel adjustment is stored in the
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated
at a later time, the stored position is called up
automatically.
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
The current steering wheel position can be
stored using the memory function.
▷
▷
Seat position.
Exterior mirror adjustment.
To make it easier to enter and get out of the
vehicle, the steering wheel moves temporarily
into the upper position.
118
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment: steering
wheel position.
Icon
Meaning
SET button.
Height of the Head-up display.
Safety information
Memory button 1.
Memory button 2.
Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Only retrieve the memory func-
tion when the vehicle is stationary.
Storing settings
Using the button:
1. Set the desired position.
Warning
2.
Press the button. The LED illumi-
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Make sure that the travel
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-
ment.
nates.
3. Press the desired memory button as long
as the LED is illuminated. A signal sounds.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Memory function
3. "Seat comfort"
Overview
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat position"
6. Save the desired seat position.
Calling up settings
Using the button:
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The stored position is called up.
The procedure stops when a seat setting
switch or one of the memory buttons is
pressed again.
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
The adjustment of the seat position on the
driver's side is interrupted after a short time
while driving.
119
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Via iDrive:
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat position"
6. Select the desired seat position.
Seat climate control
Various climate control functions are available
for the seats.
Additional information:
Climate control, refer to page 277.
120
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
Warning
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,
especially children, or animals. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave
people, especially children, or animals unat-
tended in the vehicle.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Warning
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
restraint systems and their components to
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn
injuries when touching the hot components.
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose
the child restraint system to direct sunlight
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let
the child restraint system cool down before
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
Children in the rear seat
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
General information
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-
tems designed for the age, weight and size
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable
child restraint system can no longer be used
due to their age, weight, or size.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
121
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Safety information
Installing child restraint
systems
Warning
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without
suitable additional child restraint systems.
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Secure children
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child
restraint systems.
General information
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-
erating and safety information of the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of child restraint sys-
tems and their fastening systems which have
been damaged or exposed to an accident
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-
erly restrained in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
When using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front
passenger airbag is deactivated.
Do not use child restraint systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent.
If attachment systems have been damaged
or strained by an accident, have them
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Additional information:
Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-
bag, refer to page 178.
Safety information
Warning
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
122
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
On the front passenger seat
Child seat security
Deactivating the airbag
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-
enger seat belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
After mounting a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front
passenger airbag is deactivated.
Locking the seat belt
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.
Additional information:
Automatic deactivation of front passenger air-
bag, refer to page 178.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
seat belt.
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in
and pull it tight against the child restraint
system. The seat belt is disabled.
Seat position and height
After mounting a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go and, if possible, to the lowest position. This
seat position and height ensure the best pos-
sible position for the belt and offers optimal
protection in the event of an accident.
Unlocking the seat belt
1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in
completely.
After mounting a universal child restraint sys-
tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that
the belt is not constrained.
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt
is located in front of the seat belt guide of the
child seat, move the front passenger seat care-
fully forward until the best possible seat belt
guide position is reached.
Lower anchors for child
restraint systems
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Pay attention to the specifications, operating
tips and safety instructions from the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
123
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Position
Mounts for lower anchors
Icon
Meaning
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
The corresponding icon shows
the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an-
chors are marked with a pair
(2) of LATCH icons.
Safety information
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
Warning
If the lower anchors on child restraint system
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint
system will not be able to provide suitable
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are
correctly engaged and that the child restraint
system fits securely against the backrest.
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH posi-
tions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat.
Use the vehicle seat belt in-
stead for the middle seat.
Before attaching child restraint
systems
Before installing a child restraint system, pull
the seat belt away from the lower anchors of
the child restraint system.
Warning
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower anchors or attachment points.
Installing child restraint systems
1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-
turer's information.
2. Make sure that the child restraint system
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-
chor on both sides.
Child restraint systems with
tether strap
General information
When attaching child restraint systems to the
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-
cations and the operating and safety informa-
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.
124
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Safety information
Attachment points for upper
retaining strap
Warning
Icon
Meaning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided
to the upper attachment point without twist-
ing and not over sharp edges.
The respective icon shows the
attachment point for the upper
retaining strap. Seats with an
upper top tether are marked
with this icon. It is located on
the rear seat backrest, the rear
shelf or the rear seat.
Warning
Routing the retaining strap
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests
are locked.
Warning
1
Driving direction
Head restraint
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower anchors or attachment points.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hook for upper retaining strap
Attachment point
Rear shelf
Seat backrest
Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap
to the attachment point
1. Open the attachment point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper strap between the head
restraint rods, or along both sides of the
head restraint rods, to the attachment
point.
Center seat: Guide the upper strap between
the head restraint rods, or along both sides
125
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
of the head restraint rods, to the attach-
ment point.
Safety switch for rear
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
5. Tighten the retaining strap.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
Press the button on the driver's door.
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to se-
cure the rear doors and windows, for instance
when transporting children.
Various functions are locked and can-
not be operated in the rear such as the
power windows.
Doors
Unlock or lock the safety switch on the rear
doors using the integrated key. To lock, turn in
the corresponding arrow direction on the door.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
After locking, make sure that the door cannot
be opened from the inside.
126
Driving
CONTROLS
Driving
Start/Stop button
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Driving off
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Additional information:
3. Engage the desired selector lever position,
e.g., D or R.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
4. Release the parking brake.
Start/Stop button
5. To drive off, release the brake pedal and
press the accelerator pedal.
Principle
Pressing the Start/Stop button turns drive-
ready state on/off.
Acoustic pedestrian protection
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Acoustic Pedestrian Protection
generates a continuous driving noise in vehi-
cles with electric or electrically assisted drives.
General information
Drive-ready state turns on when the brake
pedal is pressed while pushing the Start/Stop
button.
▷
With a stationary vehicle and drive-ready
state turned on, as soon as the selector
lever position P is exited.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again turns
drive-ready state back off and turns standby
state back on.
▷
With electric drive up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the
environment. As a result, other road users,
for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better
perceive the vehicle.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 43.
Standby state, refer to page 43.
Overview
Auto Start/Stop function
Principle
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
127
Driving
CONTROLS
Functional limitations
General information
The engine does not switch off automatically in
situations like the following:
The Auto Start/Stop function switches to
standby whenever the engine is started using
the Start/Stop button.
▷
▷
In case of a steep downhill grade.
The function is activated at low speeds.
Brake pedal was not depressed hard
enough.
Engine stop
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the ambient temperature is high and
automatic climate control is switched on.
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically when
stopping under the following conditions:
Vehicle interior has not yet been heated or
cooled as desired.
When window condensation is possible and
automatic climate control is switched on.
▷
The selector lever is in selector lever posi-
tion D.
Engine or other components are not at op-
erating temperature.
▷
The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is
held by Automatic Hold.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Engine cooling is required.
Vehicle battery is deeply discharged.
At higher elevations.
▷
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-
er's door is closed.
The hood is unlocked.
Manual engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automati-
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can
be switched off manually:
For stop-and-go traffic.
After driving in reverse.
Without Mild Hybrid technology: Wheels are
at a sharp angle or steering wheel is being
turned.
▷
Depress the brake pedal forcefully again
from the current pedal position.
▷
Selector lever position is S or R.
▷
Engage selector lever position P.
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,
the engine switches off.
Starting the engine
Functional requirements
The engine starts automatically under the fol-
lowing preconditions:
Air conditioning system when the
engine is switched off
The air flow from the air conditioning system is
reduced when the engine is switched off.
▷
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.
When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal.
Display in the instrument cluster
The display in the instrument
cluster indicates that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for
an automatic engine start.
Driving off
Accelerating as usual after starting the engine.
128
Driving
CONTROLS
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
Depending on vehicle equipment: Via
iDrive
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
▷
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "Auto Start/Stop"
6. Select the desired setting.
▷
Hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started using the Start/
Stop button.
Via selector lever position or drive
mode
The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated by
the following:
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-
tivated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
▷
▷
With selector lever position S.
In driving mode: "SPORT".
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle interior is extremely hot when the
cooling is on.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle
can be parked safely, for example to leave it.
Vehicle interior is extremely cold when the
heating is on.
When window condensation is possible and
automatic climate control is switched on.
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
Without mild hybrid technology:
In case of a steering operation.
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.
Standby state is switched on.
▷
▷
▷
When changing selector lever position from
D or P.
Selector lever position P is engaged au-
tomatically.
In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-
tery.
2. Set the parking brake.
When starting an oil level measurement.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.
Deactivating the system manually
Principle
In certain driving situations, e.g., traffic jams,
it may be helpful to deactivate Auto Start/
Stop manually. The engine will then no longer
switch off automatically.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. You may con-
tinue driving. Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
If this function is deactivated while the engine
is being stopped automatically, the engine will
start.
129
Driving
CONTROLS
P is engaged automatically
Steptronic transmission
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally in situations such as the following:
Principle
▷
▷
▷
After drive-ready state is switched off, if se-
lector lever position R, D, or S is engaged.
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's
automatic transmission. With shift paddles, it
offers the option of manual shifting if needed.
After standby is switched off, if selector
lever position N is engaged.
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is opened while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D, S,
or R is engaged.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
your vehicle, secure it against rolling away,
e.g., by applying the parking brake.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-
lector lever position P is engaged and the
parking brake is engaged. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle may begin to move.
Additional information:
Parking brake, refer to page 138.
Selector lever positions
Engaging selector lever positions
Gear position D
Selector lever position for normal driving. All
gears for forward travel are activated automat-
ically.
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear position or reverse gear, main-
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to drive off.
R reverse gear
In certain situations, e.g., to rock free on snow,
it is possible to shift between reverse gear and
gear position D without pressing the brake.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
drive, for instance in car washes, in selector
lever position N.
Functional requirements
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible
to change from selector lever position P to an-
other selector lever position.
Parking position P
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical prerequisites are
met.
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
in selector lever position P.
130
Driving
CONTROLS
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Fasten driver's seat belt.
NOTICE
2. Tilt or pull the selector lever into the desired
direction, past a resistance point, if needed.
The selector lever automatically returns to
the center position when released.
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
gaged when standby state is switched off.
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not switch off standby
if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car
wash.
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing
on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, loosen the belt.
3. If necessary, open the door.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Engage selector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
Engaging selector lever position P
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis-
played.
The vehicle can roll.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally after approximately 35 minutes.
If the system is not operational, you may not
be able to change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed.
Press the button.
The parking brake is applied and the
transmission lock is engaged.
Additional information:
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,
refer to page 132.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to
roll without its own drive for a short distance,
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-
sistance point at the full throttle position.
131
Driving
CONTROLS
S Sport mode
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
Principle
General information
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for sportier han-
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure
the vehicle against rolling away, for instance
with a wheel chock.
Activating the Sport program
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Quickly press the Start/Stop button three
times without pressing the brake.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the selector lever to position N until
position N is shown on the selector lever.
An appropriate Check Control message is
displayed.
Pull the selector lever from selector lever posi-
tion D to D/S.
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous
area and secure it against rolling away.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti-
vated.
Shift paddles
Ending the Sport program
Pull the selector lever to D/S.
Principle
The shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to change gears manually.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and
road speeds.
Even in manual mode, the transmission shifts
automatically in certain situations, e.g., when
speed limits are reached.
Temporary manual mode
In selector lever position D, pulling a shift pad-
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
132
Driving
CONTROLS
The engaged gear is also displayed in the in-
strument cluster, for instance D1.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in-
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
Advanced mode
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Step-
tronic transmission offers an advanced mode
with adapted shift characteristics.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷
▷
▷
Automatic downshift to lowest possible
gear.
▷
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
If the left shift paddle is pulled and held, the
Steptronic transmission automatically shifts
down to the lowest possible gear.
Continuous manual mode
In Sport program S, pulling a shift paddle
switches to manual mode M permanently.
Avoid automatic upshifting in manual
mode.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
In manual mode, the Steptronic transmis-
sion does not shift up automatically when
speed limits are reached.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
▷
▷
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is
displayed on the instrument cluster.
There is no downshifting for kickdown.
Enabling advanced mode
The advanced mode is enabled in manual
mode when Dynamic Stability Control is disa-
bled.
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
Pull the selector lever to D/S.
When M2 is set manually while the vehicle is
stationary, the transmission will no longer shift
back to M1. This shift behavior is maintained
until M1 is engaged manually or manual mode
M is exited.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the ad-
vanced mode can also be enabled in manual
mode as follows, for example:
▷
"SPORT PLUS": Setting under Drive in
Sport Mode in My Modes.
Shifting
▷
Increased driving dynamics enabled.
Launch Control
Principle
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on roads with good traction under dry sur-
rounding conditions.
▷
▷
Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle.
Downshifting: pull left shift paddle.
133
Driving
CONTROLS
Launch Control stays on as long as the
Launch Control information is displayed
and the accelerator pedal is not released.
General information
Using Launch Control causes premature com-
ponent wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Repeated use during a trip
Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off
with Launch Control.
After Launch Control has been used, the trans-
mission must cool down for a short time before
Launch Control can be used again. Launch
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions
when used again.
Do not use Launch Control when breaking in
the vehicle.
Additional information:
Break-in, refer to page 310.
After using Launch Control
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
Functional requirement
Launch Control can be used when the engine
is at operating temperature. The engine is at
operating temperature after an uninterrupted
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF without
Launch Control mode.
Driving off with Launch Control
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Engage forward gear.
Sport Boost function
3.
Activate drive mode.
Principle
4. Enabling the driving dynamics setting:
"SPORT PLUS".
The SPORT BOOST function can be used for
upcoming acceleration, for example.
5. With the left foot, press down forcefully on
the brake.
The system prepares the vehicle for the up-
coming acceleration process. The response
characteristics of the accelerator pedal be-
come more sporty.
6. Press the accelerator pedal all the way
down and hold.
Launch Control information is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
General information
7. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait
briefly until the engine speed is constant.
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.
The Sport Boost function is operated with the
shift paddles on the steering wheel.
8. Release the brake within a few seconds of
the Launch Control information illuminating.
The vehicle accelerates.
Upshifting is performed automatically as
long as the Launch Control information is
displayed and the accelerator pedal is not
released.
134
Driving
CONTROLS
To restart the countdown, pull and hold the left
shift paddle again until the countdown is reset.
Overview
Stopping the function
The function is automatically interrupted if the
countdown has reached 0 or if the function
was used in the acceleration process.
Deactivating the function
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until this
display goes out.
The shift paddles for the Sport Boost function
are located on the steering wheel.
My Modes
Display in the instrument cluster
Principle
My Modes influence vehicle handling and the
customizable effects for the overall experience
inside the vehicle.
The vehicle can be adapted depending on the
situation using the various My Modes.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
systems are affected, for example:
▷
▷
▷
Arrow 1: The function is active.
Arrow 2: Countdown, the function is active.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Drivetrain.
Arrow 3: The function is used for maximum
acceleration.
Steering.
Chassis.
Cruise control.
Using the function
1. SPORT BOOST: Pull and hold the left shift
paddle until this display appears, arrow 1.
Display in the instrument cluster.
Comfort features in the vehicle interior.
BMW IconicSounds.
▷
▷
The function is active.
A countdown is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster, arrow 2.
2. Before the countdown changes to 0, press
the accelerator pedal.
▷
▷
The vehicle accelerates.
BOOST: This display is shown on the
instrument cluster, arrow 3.
The countdown can be restarted, for example
if the function cannot be used immediately.
135
Driving
CONTROLS
Additional information:
Overview
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 214.
▷
Setting for increased driving dynamics, re-
fer to page 215.
Efficient Mode
Driving mode for a consumption optimized set-
ting with anticipatory display.
Additional information:
My Modes
Efficient mode, refer to page 318.
More My Modes
Depending on the vehicle equipment, more My
Modes are available that change the ambiance
in the vehicle interior:
Displays in the instrument cluster
If applicable, the driving mode
selected is displayed on the in-
strument cluster.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Expressive Mode.
Digital Art Mode.
Relax Mode.
Silent Mode.
My Modes in detail
Selecting My Modes
General information
Various My Modes are available depending on
vehicle equipment.
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch mode"
Some My Modes affect vehicle handling. As
such, these are also referred to as drive
modes.
3. Select the desired mode.
Configuring My Modes
Some My Modes can be configured individu-
ally.
Personal Mode
Driving mode for comfort oriented settings.
Sport Mode
Driving mode for increased agility of the vehi-
cle.
1.
Press the button.
2. Select the desired mode.
3. "Settings"
Individual settings, e.g., for driving dynamics,
chassis, and drive system, can be configured
as needed.
4. Select the desired settings.
"SPORT PLUS": Under Driving Dynamics, this
setting deactivates Dynamic Stability Control,
thus limiting driving stability.
Changing the start mode
Some My Modes can be set as the start mode.
136
Driving
CONTROLS
The set start mode activates when drive-ready
state is turned on.
Safety information
Warning
1.
Press the button.
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
2. Select the desired mode.
3. "Settings"
4. "Start mode"
5. Select the desired mode.
My Modes Design
Specific depictions of a mode can be shown on
the control display under My Modes Design.
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
1.
Press the button.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
2. "My Modes design"
My Programs
Principle
My Programs allows various vehicle functions
to be balanced with one another in the vehicle
interior. For example, the interior lighting, air
conditioning, and music selection can be ad-
justed. This can help the driver to concentrate
when driving, for example.
Functional requirements
Various requirements must be met for these
programs.
Vitalize Program:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is engaged.
All doors are closed.
General information
My Programs can be selected in parallel with
My Modes.
An entertainment source is enabled.
The automatic climate control is on.
The following programs are available, depend-
ing on vehicle equipment:
Rear Seat View Program:
▷
The vehicle is equipped with an interior
camera.
▷
▷
Vitalize Program.
Rear Seat View Program.
▷
The automatic climate control is on.
137
Driving
CONTROLS
Additional information:
My Programs in detail
Automatic Hold, refer to page 140.
Program
Description
Vitalize
Program.
This program lasts three mi-
nutes and vitalizes the interior,
e.g., with climate control and
light pulses as well as audio ef-
fects.
Parking brake
Principle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling away when it is parked.
Rear Seat This program creates an at-
View Pro- mosphere that promotes sleep
gram.
Safety information
for the rear occupants.
Warning
Activating/deactivating My
Programs
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. Select the desired program:
▷
▷
"VITALIZE"
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
"REAR SEAT VIEW"
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
4. Select the desired settings.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
This program may deactivate automatically,
e.g., if the vehicle's operating state is changed
or a functional requirement is no longer being
met.
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Drive-off assistant
Principle
On inclines, in selector lever position D, S, or
R, this system prevents the vehicle from rolling
opposite the set driving direction and provides
drive-off support.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Driving off
Engage a gear position and step on the accel-
erator pedal to drive off.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
The parking brake is released automatically.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
Depending on the vehicle load or driving situa-
tion, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
If necessary, activate Automatic Hold.
138
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,
and the brake lights illuminate.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking brake is engaged and the trans-
mission lock is set when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Engaging the parking brake
automatically
Overview
In some situations, the parking brake is en-
gaged automatically, e.g., through Automatic
Hold.
Additionally, the system can be set to auto-
matically engaging the parking brake when the
drive-ready state is turned off.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Parking brake
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "Parking brake"
Setting the parking brake
6. Select the desired setting.
In selector lever position N, the parking brake
will not be engaged automatically.
With a stationary vehicle
Press the parking brake button.
The LED illuminates.
Releasing the parking brake
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red.
Releasing the parking brake manually
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
The parking brake is engaged and
transmission lock is engaged.
2.
Push the parking brake button while
pressing the brake pedal.
While driving
Use while driving serves as an emergency
braking function.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
The transmission lock remains engaged
until a gear position is selected.
Press and hold the parking brake but-
ton. The vehicle brakes hard for as long
as the parking brake button is pressed.
139
Driving
CONTROLS
Possible function-related noises are nor-
mal.
Releasing the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive off.
The indicator light indicates that the
parking brake is ready for operation
again.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
Using the parking brake via iDrive
The parking brake can be engaged or disen-
gaged via iDrive. Additionally, further informa-
tion is displayed.
Automatic Hold
Principle
Automatic Hold provides assistance by auto-
matically applying and releasing the brake,
e.g., when driving off on inclines or in stop-
and-go traffic.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "Parking brake"
When a gear position is engaged, the vehicle
is automatically held in place when it is station-
ary.
6. Select the desired setting.
General information
The parking brake is automatically engaged
under the following conditions:
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away
before you exit.
▷
▷
If drive-ready state is turned off.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The driver’s door is open for more than one
second and no pedal is pressed during this
time.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of
the vehicle.
▷
If the parking brake is used to brake the
vehicle to a stop while driving.
After a power interruption
To reestablish parking brake operability after
a power interruption, an initialization may be
required.
In selector lever position N, Automatic Hold is
temporarily deactivated.
Safety information
1. Turn on standby state.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
2.
3.
Press the parking brake button.
Press the parking brake button
again after 2 seconds.
The Check Control messages for the park-
ing brake go out.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
140
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Activating Automatic Hold
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
2.
Press the button.
The LED illuminates.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
The indicator light illuminates green.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s
door is closed.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
After stopping, the vehicle is automat-
ically secured against rolling away as
soon as the indicator light illuminates
green.
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
Automatic parking brake application
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle
is exited.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the ve-
hicle key with you when exiting and lock the
vehicle.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically if
the drive-ready state was switched off while
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is
temporarily deactivated in this case.
Overview
Driving off
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically and the
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer
illuminated.
The vehicle may roll back slightly when driving
off, depending on the load.
Use the parking brake as needed to prevent
the vehicle from rolling back when driving off.
Automatic Hold
141
Driving
CONTROLS
Deactivate Automatic Hold
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
The indicator light goes out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
also press the brake pedal when deactivating.
142
Displays
CONTROLS
Displays
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Overview
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Instrument cluster
Principle
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,
temperature as well as indicator and warning
lights.
Instrument cluster
Display ranges on the instrument
cluster
General information
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to
the respective driving mode. The positions of
some displays may vary, e.g., the selector lever
display.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Manual.
1
Speedometer
Safety information
2
Driver assistance systems 219
Parking assistance systems 247
Driver Attention Camera 213
Check Control 146
Warning
3
4
If the driving information displays on the in-
strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,
do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Imme-
diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.
Turning drive-ready state off and on again
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-
Selector lever display 130
Gear shift indicator 154
Selection lists 153
Efficiency trainer 318
Power gauge 154
5
Tachometer 155
143
Displays
CONTROLS
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel
on the steering wheel where applicable.
6
7
Engine temperature 156
Outside temperature 156
Central display range 157
Shift lights 157
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled
wheel on the steering wheel.
8
9
My Modes drive mode 135
Settings
10 Speed Limit Info 219
Speed Limit Assistant 243
11 Time 160
Specific displays can be configured individu-
ally, e.g., a second actual speed.
1.
Apps menu
12 Fuel gauge 161
Range 161
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument cluster"
5. Select the desired setting.
Additional information:
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 147.
Operating elements on the steering
wheel
Live Vehicle
Principle
Operating Function
element
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your
vehicle with different information, e.g., vehicle
status or current driving condition.
Display the menu bar on the in-
strument cluster.
General information
Turn knurled wheel: scroll selec-
tion up or down.
Corresponding information is shown on the
control display depending on the driving situa-
tion. Fault statuses are not taken into account.
Adaptive content or various static content can
be selected.
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-
sponding direction: Move selec-
tion to left or right.
Press knurled wheel: confirm
selection.
Adaptive content
The following content is displayed in alternat-
ing order and, if necessary, depending on the
selected drive mode:
Configuring the layout
In Personal Mode drive mode, the layout in
the instrument cluster can be individually con-
figured and displayed.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle status, refer to page 161.
Current driving condition, refer to page 162.
Sport displays, refer to page 162.
Efficiency trainer, refer to page 318.
Trip data, refer to page 158.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
2. "LAYOUT"
144
Displays
CONTROLS
Adjusting the display
Overview
In the Live Vehicle menu, adaptive content or
various static content for the display can be
selected on the left-hand side bar:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. Select the desired setting.
Head-up display views are projected onto the
windshield through a protective glass. The pro-
tective glass is located between the steering
wheel and windshield.
BMW Head-up display
Principle
The Head-up display projects important infor-
mation, e.g., speed, onto the windshield in the
driver's field of view. Information can be re-
corded without you having to look away from
the road.
Displayable information
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up display:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle speed.
The steering wheel buttons can be used to
configure various views for the Head-up dis-
play. More settings can be configured on the
control display, e.g., brightness, height, or rota-
tion.
Navigation instructions.
Check Control messages.
Sport displays.
Shift lights.
Efficiency trainer.
General information
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.
Lists and messages.
Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Additional information:
Caring for special components, refer to
page 382.
Configuring a view
The views for the Head-up display can be set
independently of the display on the instrument
cluster, e.g., a reduced view.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
2. "HEAD-UP"
145
Displays
CONTROLS
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel
on the steering wheel where applicable.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled
wheel on the steering wheel.
The shape and coating of the special wind-
shield enable the system to function.
If damaged, have the special windshield re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Turning the Head-up display on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
Check Control
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Head-up display"
Principle
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the
monitored systems.
Settings
Various settings can be configured for the
Head-up display, e.g., height, brightness, or
rotation. In addition, individual displays in the
Head-up display can be set up separately such
as for Driver Assistance.
A Check Control message is displayed as
a combination of indicator lights or warning
lights and text messages on the instrument
cluster and, if applicable, on the Head-up dis-
play. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound
and a text message may appear on the control
display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
Some Check Control messages are hidden au-
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they
will be stored. Stored Check Control messages
can be displayed on the control display. Urgent
Check Control messages are permanently dis-
played but may be hidden temporarily.
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting.
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
display is influenced by the following factors:
Hiding Check Control messages
▷
▷
Seat position.
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-
sages are automatically displayed again after
approx. 8 seconds.
Objects on the Head-up display's protective
glass.
▷
Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's pro-
tective glass.
An arrow icon next to the Check Control
message indicates whether the Check Control
message can be hidden.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
Wet road.
To hide Check Control messages, tilt
the knurled wheel on the steering
wheel to the left.
Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-
tings checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
146
Displays
CONTROLS
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Additional information such as the cause of a
fault or the required action can be called up via
Check Control.
Indicator lights and warning
lights
Principle
The indicator lights and the warning lights on
the instrument cluster show the status of some
functions in the vehicle. The indicator lights
and warning lights indicate faults in monitored
systems.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-
ther help can be selected.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
General information
Indicator lights and warning lights can illumi-
nate in a variety of combinations and colors.
4. "Check Control"
5. Select the desired text message.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and illuminate temporarily when
drive-ready state is turned on.
Display
A Check Control message is displayed in the
instrument cluster as a text message with an
icon.
Red lights
For urgent messages, an added text is auto-
matically displayed on the control display.
Seat belt reminder
If several faults occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not
buckled.
Certain messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
Additional information:
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 112.
Icons in the instrument cluster indicate
an active or saved Check Control mes-
sage.
Airbag system
Warning light illuminates briefly: indi-
cates that the entire airbag system and
seat belt tensioners are operational
when drive-ready state is switched on.
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates
continuously: the airbag system or the seat
belt tensioners may not be operational. Have
the vehicle checked immediately by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Airbags, refer to page 176.
147
Displays
CONTROLS
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to
page 187.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Additional information:
Parking brake, refer to page 138.
Forward Collision Warning
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.
Increased awareness is required.
Brake system
The brake pads are worn or there is
another issue with the brake system.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-
neuver.
The braking assistance may not be op-
erational. A higher pedal force may be
required for braking.
Additional information:
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Warning function in rear-end collision situa-
tions, refer to page 184.
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
detected from the right
Emergency Stop Assistant
The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-
gered.
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion with vehicle crossing from the right
detected. Increased awareness is re-
quired.
Additional information:
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 204.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an
evasive maneuver.
Risk of collision
Warning light illuminates or flashes in
conjunction with an acoustic signal if
there is risk of imminent collision.
Additional information:
Warning function at intersections, refer to
page 188.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to
page 181.
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
detected from the left
Pedestrian Warning
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion with vehicle crossing from the left
detected. Increased awareness is re-
quired.
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion with a person, e.g., a pedestrian
or a cyclist. Increased awareness is re-
quired.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an
evasive maneuver.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a person, e.g., a pe-
destrian or a cyclist. Immediately initiate brak-
ing or an evasive maneuver.
Additional information:
Additional information:
148
Displays
CONTROLS
Warning function at intersections, refer to
page 188.
Immediately grasp the steering wheel with
your hands and pay attention to the surround-
ing traffic.
Additional information:
Distance Control
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-
sary.
Yellow lights
Additional information:
Antilock Braking System
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
The system may not be operational.
The Antilock Braking System is not
available.
Assisted Driving Mode
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-
nal sounds:
The ability to steer may be restricted
during full braking.
The system is switched off or will be
interrupted very soon.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Warning light illuminates and acoustic signal
sounds:
Additional information:
The driver's line of sight is not directed at the
surrounding traffic. System interruption is im-
minent. The system reduces the speed to a
standstill if applicable. It is possible that the
system will not execute any supporting steer-
ing movements.
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 214.
Assisted Driving Mode
Warning light illuminates and acoustic
signal sounds: A system interruption is
imminent.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Warning light flashes: A lane boundary has
been crossed.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not
on steering wheel
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Warning light illuminates and acoustic
signal sounds:
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not
on steering wheel
The hands are not on the steering
wheel or, depending on the vehicle equipment
and national-market version, the driver's line of
sight is not directed at the surrounding traffic.
System interruption is imminent.
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. The system is still active.
Grab the steering wheel with your
hands.
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if
applicable.
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
It is possible that the system will not execute
any supporting steering movements.
149
Displays
CONTROLS
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 346.
Dynamic Stability Control
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the driving and
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-
ing style to the road conditions.
Tire pressure monitor
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or
tire pressure loss has been detected.
Follow the information in the Check
Control message.
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot
be detected.
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
area of the interference, the system auto-
matically becomes active again.
Additional information:
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 214.
In the case of tires with special appro-
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable
to complete the reset. Reset the system
again.
The Dynamic Stability Control
deactivated or increased driving
dynamics activated
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:
Have it checked by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop as needed.
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated
or enhanced driving dynamics is acti-
vated.
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by
an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 214.
Additional information:
▷
Setting for increased driving dynamics, re-
fer to page 215.
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 339.
Steering system
Drive-off support
The steering system may not be op-
erational.
Drive-off support is activated.
Additional information:
Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Drive-off support, refer to page 216.
Flat tire monitor
Exhaust emissions
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or
tire pressure loss has been detected.
▷
The warning light illuminates:
Reduce your speed and stop cau-
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
The exhaust gas quality is declining,
e.g., because the fuel filler cap is
Additional information:
150
Displays
CONTROLS
fitted incorrectly. Have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Parking lights
Parking lights are switched on.
Additional information:
▷
The warning light flashes under certain cir-
cumstances:
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,
refer to page 167.
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
riod can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con-
verter.
Low-beam headlights
Low-beam headlights are switched on.
Additional information:
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,
refer to page 167.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Automatic High Beam Assistant
Additional information:
Low-beam headlights are switched on
and the Automatic High Beam Assis-
tant is activated.
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to
page 365.
High-beam headlights are switched on and
off automatically depending on the traffic sit-
uation.
Acoustic pedestrian protection
Acoustic pedestrian protection has
malfunctioned. Increased caution when
maneuvering.
Additional information:
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
page 165.
If malfunctioning repeatedly, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Lane departure warning
Additional information:
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version:
Acoustic pedestrian protection, refer to
page 127.
Indicator light flashes: the system ac-
tively issues a warning. If necessary, the sys-
tem performs a steering intervention.
Green lights
Additional information:
Turn signal
Lane departure warning, refer to page 192.
Turn signal is on.
Automatic Hold is activated
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
After stopping, Automatic Hold auto-
matically secures the vehicle to prevent
it from rolling away.
Additional information:
Turn signal, refer to page 164.
Additional information:
Automatic Hold, refer to page 140.
151
Displays
CONTROLS
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in
progress
Automatic Hold secures the stopped
vehicle to prevent it from rolling away,
e.g., when stopped at a traffic light.
Arrow icon for lane change green: the
system carries out a lane change.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Automatic Hold, refer to page 140.
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 235.
Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to
page 237.
Cruise Control
The system is active.
Lane Change Assistant: lane change
not possible
Additional information:
Cruise control, refer to page 223.
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-
propriate side: system detected a lane
change request. Lane change not cur-
rently possible.
Distance Control
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been
detected ahead of you.
Additional information:
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 235.
Indicator light flashes: Preceding vehicle has
driven off.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
The system is active.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 240.
Speed Limit Assist
The detected speed limit can be ap-
plied with the SET button. As soon as
the speed limit has been applied, a
green checkmark is displayed.
Blue lights
High-beam headlights
Additional information:
High-beam headlights have been
switched on.
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 243.
Additional information:
High-beam headlights, refer to page 164.
Assisted Driving Mode
The system supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
Gray lights
Additional information:
Seat belt reminder
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.
Additional information:
152
Displays
CONTROLS
Seat belts, refer to page 110.
Selection lists
Distance Control
Principle
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or
the Head-up display.
not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but ap-
plies the brakes until you actively resume con-
trol by pressing on the brake pedal or accelera-
tor pedal.
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.
Current audio source.
List of most recent telephone calls.
Additional information:
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
on the control display.
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
Assisted Driving Mode
Displaying and using the list
The selection lists can be displayed and op-
erated using the operating elements on the
steering wheel.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon
as all function conditions are fulfilled.
Operating Function
elements
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Change the entertainment
source.
White lights
Pressing the button again will
close the currently displayed list.
Cruise Control with Distance Control
Show list of most recent tele-
phone calls.
No Distance Control because accelera-
tor pedal is being pressed.
Turn the knurled wheel: display
the list for currently selected en-
tertainment source or scroll up
or down in the list.
Additional information:
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-
sponding direction: Move selec-
tion to left or right.
The system can be used.
Additional information:
Press knurled wheel: confirm
selection.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 240.
153
Displays
CONTROLS
Display
Gear shift indicator
Principle
The shift point indicator recommends the gear
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-
ing style.
General information
The gear shift indicator is active in manual
mode M depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version.
Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are
displayed on the instrument cluster.
Example: selecting a radio station
Displays
Information on upshifting, downshifting, or en-
gaged gear is displayed on the instrument
cluster.
1.
Press the entertainment sources
button.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
2.
To switch to the list of radio sta-
tions, tilt the knurled wheel to the right.
Example Description
3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio
station.
In continuous manual mode M:
Optimal gear is engaged.
4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-
lected radio station.
With shift paddles: temporary
manual mode.
Example: changing the entertainment
source
With shift paddles: Sport program.
Shift information.
1.
Press the entertainment sources
button.
2.
To select an entertainment source,
turn the knurled wheel.
Additional information:
Shift paddles, refer to page 132.
3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-
lected entertainment source.
Power gauge
Principle
The power gauge indicates the currently
drawn drive power as a percentage.
154
Displays
CONTROLS
Enabling/disabling the power gauge
Icon
Description
The power display or tachometer is shown de-
pending on the driving mode selected or the
individual configuration of the layout.
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.
White icon: increased drive sys-
tem temperature, for instance
due to sustained or high
power demand when driving
on mountain roads.
Display
Depending on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market ver-
sion:
Drive power limitation defined
via the BMW Digital Key.
System-related functional limi-
tation.
Needle in range of arrow 1: display for energy
recovery such as while decelerating CHARGE.
A Check Control message is
displayed in addition where ap-
plicable.
Needle in range of arrow 2: the drive power in
percent, POWER.
Tachometer
Reduced drive power
The available power may be reduced due to
certain factors. The power gauge is automati-
cally adjusted accordingly.
General information
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect
the engine.
In addition, the icons on the power gauge and
tachometer indicate reduced drive power.
Activating/deactivating the
tachometer
The tachometer is displayed depending on the
selected drive mode or the individually config-
ured layout.
The tachometer display changes depending
on the selected driving mode.
Reduced rotational speed range
The available rotational speed range may be
reduced due certain factors such as a cold
drive system. The tachometer display is auto-
matically adjusted depending on the available
rotational speed range.
155
Displays
CONTROLS
Display
Standby state and drive-
ready state
▷
Cold engine: the needle
is in the blue temperature
range, close to the stop of
the temperature display, and
the word WARM-UP is dis-
played.
OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. Drive-ready state
is turned off and standby state
turned on.
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
READY is displayed in the
instrument cluster. The Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for
automatic engine start.
▷
▷
Normal operating temperature: the needle
is in the middle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-
ature range. In addition, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Additional information:
▷
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to
page 41.
Additional information:
▷
Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 127.
Coolant level, refer to page 361.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
Engine temperature
A red indicator light is displayed.
▷
Cold engine: the needle
is in the blue temperature
range, close to the stop of
the temperature display, and
the word WARM-UP is dis-
played.
Outside temperature
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
General information
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
▷
▷
Normal operating temperature: the needle
is in the middle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-
ature range. In addition, a Check Control
message is displayed.
When the vehicle is stationary or at low speed,
the temperature displayed may differ slightly
from the actual outside temperature due to ex-
ternal environmental influences.
Additional information:
Coolant level, refer to page 361.
156
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Shift when all fields illuminate red at the
latest.
Safety information
When the maximum rotational speed is
reached, the entire display flashes red and
the fuel supply is interrupted in order to
protect the engine.
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There
is a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-
age. Modify your driving style to the weather
conditions at low temperatures.
Central display range
Displayable content
The following settings can be selected:
Shift lights
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Reduced display.
Trip data, refer to page 158.
Assisted View, refer to page 159.
Navigation system route preview.
Navigation system map view.
G-Meter, refer to page 160.
Entertainment.
Principle
Shift lights indicate the suitable upshift point at
which optimal acceleration can be achieved.
General information
The shift lights are active in manual mode M
and can be displayed on the instrument cluster
or on the Head-up display in combination with
the tachometer.
Augmented View.
Depending on vehicle equipment, Aug-
mented View on the instrument cluster en-
ables the visualization of driver assistance
systems on the actual vehicle's surround-
ings.
Functional prerequisite
Manual mode M must be activated for the shift
lights to appear.
Grey lines indicate the recommended min-
imum distance to the preceding vehicle
when speed control systems are deacti-
vated.
Display
▷
Android Auto©.
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, select functions of
a compatible smartphone can also be dis-
played, e.g., map views.
Some contents for the central display range
can also be configured as a view in the Head-
up display.
Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate
an upcoming shift point.
Additional information:
Head-up display, refer to page 145.
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
157
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Travel time depending on the config-
ured interval.
Configuring the central display
range
The content of the central display range on the
instrument cluster can be configured individu-
ally, for instance the trip data display.
Distance traveled depending on the
configured interval.
Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
Displaying trip data continuously
1.
Press the button on the steering
1.
Apps menu
wheel.
2. "Vehicle"
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
5. "Trip data"
2. "CONTENT"
Select the menu by tilting the knurled wheel
on the steering wheel where applicable.
Display in the instrument cluster
Information on consumption and distance cov-
ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled
wheel on the steering wheel.
Trip data
Principle
The trip data display provides various informa-
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption
or trip distance.
General information
The trip data can be displayed on the control
display and in the instrument cluster.
▷
▷
▷
Current consumption, arrow 1.
Average consumption, arrow 2.
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle
menu, the trip data is shown on the control
display.
Distance traveled depending on the config-
ured interval, arrow 3.
The icon is displayed when the vehicle
is in Coasting mode.
The values can be displayed and reset de-
pending on different intervals.
▷
Total mileage, arrow 4.
Display on the control display
Current consumption
General information
The following trip data is shown on the control
display:
The current fuel consumption display allows
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,
to drive economically and in an environmen-
tally-friendly manner.
▷
▷
Configured interval for displaying trip data.
Average fuel consumption depending
on the configured interval.
Mild hybrid technology: Depending on vehi-
cle equipment, the fuel supply is interrupted
158
Displays
CONTROLS
and the engine continues to run when driving
slowly or even when the vehicle is stationary.
In this case, the internal combustion engine is
operated electrically.
Using the knurled wheel on the steering wheel:
1. Display trip data in the instrument cluster.
2. Press and hold the
knurled wheel
Average consumption
The average fuel consumption is displayed de-
pending on how the intervals for displaying trip
data are configured.
on the steering wheel until the values are
reset.
Via iDrive:
1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Adjusting the display of the trip data
3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for trip data"
5. "Reset Individual"
The intervals for the display of the trip data
in the instrument cluster and on the control
display are adjustable.
The average values and counters are reset.
Once the average values and counters have
been reset, the following interval is automati-
cally activated:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for trip data"
5. "Values"
"Since Individual ( )"
6. Select the desired setting:
Assisted View
▷
▷
▷
▷
"Since start of trip": the values are auto-
matically reset approx. four hours after
the vehicle has come to a standstill.
Principle
"Since last refuel": the values are au-
tomatically reset after refueling with a
larger quantity of fuel.
With Assisted View, information on driver as-
sistance systems can be displayed on the in-
strument cluster with a vehicle animation.
"Since factory": the values since the
time of the factory delivery are dis-
played.
Safety information
"Since Individual": the values since the
last manual reset are displayed. The
values can be reset at any time.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Resetting average values manually
The following interval can be reset manually at
any time:
"Since Individual ( )"
159
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 36.
Permanent display
You can configure how Assisted View is dis-
played on the central display range and have it
shown permanently.
Radar sensors, refer to page 37.
G-Meter
Additional information:
Central display area, refer to page 157
General information
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction
on the vehicle occupants while driving.
Temporary display
With the temporary display, Assisted View is
always shown when driver assistance systems
are active, regardless of how the central dis-
play range is configured.
The display can be configured on the central
display range of the instrument cluster.
The values are automatically reset whenever
you start a new drive.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Additional information:
3. "Displays"
Central display area, refer to page 157
4. "Instrument cluster"
5. "Assisted Driving info will appear in front of
other content"
Manually reseting G-Meter values
1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument
cluster.
Display
2.
Press and hold the knurled wheel
on the steering wheel until the values are
reset.
Date and time
Various settings can be applied for the date
and time display such as the date format.
An example of active Driver Assistance: Indica-
tor and warning lights for Distance Control and
Assisted Driving Mode are displayed. At the
same time, the Distance Control is animated in
Assisted View.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the time zone can be set or
automatic time zone enabled. With automatic
time setting, the time, date and, if necessary,
the time zone are updated automatically.
1.
Apps menu
System limits
The system's detection capability is limited.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. Select the desired settings.
Only objects that are detected by the system
are taken into account.
Additional information:
160
Displays
CONTROLS
The Check Control message appears
continuously below a range of approx.
30 miles/50 km.
Fuel gauge
Principle
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-
played.
Safety information
NOTICE
General information
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.
There is a risk of property damage. Refuel
promptly.
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
Additional information:
Refueling, refer to page 322.
Display
Display
An arrow beside the fuel pump
icon shows which side of the ve-
hicle the fuel filler flap is on.
The current range is displayed
as a numerical value next to the
fuel gauge.
The current range is displayed
as numerical value.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
Setting the units of
measurement
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Depending on the national-market version, you
can set the units of measurement for some
values, for instance consumption, distances,
and temperature.
Range
1.
Apps menu
Principle
2. "Vehicle"
The range indicates the distance that can still
be covered with the current tank of fuel.
3. "System settings"
4. "Units"
5. Select the desired setting.
General information
The estimated range with remaining fuel is
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-
ter.
Vehicle status
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining
range means that engine functions cannot al-
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when
cornering at speed.
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems such as for Check
Control.
161
Displays
CONTROLS
Depending on the situation, additional in-
formation on adaptive recuperation is dis-
played.
Displaying vehicle status
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
▷
Efficient rolling with engine switched off.
3. "Vehicle status"
Additional information:
▷
▷
Adaptive recuperation, refer to page 316.
Coasting, refer to page 317.
Overview
Icon
Description
Functional requirements
"FLAT TIRE MONITOR": Sta-
tus of the flat tire monitor, refer
to page 346.
▷
Personal or Efficient driving mode is se-
lected.
▷
For Live Vehicle, select the following set-
ting: "Adaptive content".
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 339.
Display
"Engine oil level": electronic
oil measurement, refer to
page 359.
"Check Control": displaying
stored Check Control mes-
sages, refer to page 146.
"Service": display of the service
notifications, refer to page 163.
An example:
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.
Current driving condition
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-
cle decelerates, arrow 2.
General information
The current driving condition is displayed dy-
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle
menu on the control display.
Sport displays
The following states can be displayed:
Principle
▷
▷
▷
Driving.
The Sport displays especially support a sporty
driving style.
Coasting mode: "EFFICIENT COASTING"
"CHARGING BATTERY"
With mild hybrid technology:
Adaptive recuperation.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
SPORT driving mode is selected.
▷
The following setting is selected for Live
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"
162
Displays
CONTROLS
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Display
The sport displays are displayed in the Live
Vehicle menu on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
The following information is displayed:
2. "Vehicle"
▷
▷
▷
▷
Torque.
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Service"
Power.
Boost pressure.
Engine oil temperature.
5. "Vehicle inspection"
6. "Date:"
7. Select the desired setting.
Service
Principle
The service notifications indicate recom-
mended maintenance work.
General information
After turning on, the next service appointment
or the distance remaining until the next servic-
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-
ter.
A service advisor can read out the mainte-
nance work from the vehicle key.
Display
More information may be displayed on the
control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Service"
Maintenance measures as well as legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
5. Select the desired entry.
Entering appointment dates
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can
be entered.
163
Light and view
CONTROLS
Light and view
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
6. Select the desired setting.
Brief flashing
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
High-beam headlights,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Flashing
▷
▷
High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.
The high-beam headlights illuminate when
the low-beam headlights are switched on.
High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,
arrow 2.
Press the lever past the resistance point.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates when the high-beam
headlights are turned on.
One-touch signaling
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-
justed.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
164
Light and view
CONTROLS
The blue indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-
tem switches on the high-beam head-
Automatic High Beam
Assistant
lights.
Principle
Interruption of the journey with activated Au-
tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic
High Beam Assistant remains activated when
continuing the journey.
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects
other road users early on and automatically
switches the high-beam headlights on or off
depending on the traffic situation.
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti-
vated when manually switching the high-beam
headlights on and off.
General information
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures
that the high-beam headlights are switched
on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the
low speed range, the high-beam headlights
are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-
ies.
The high-beam headlights can be switched on
and off manually at any time.
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-
tant, press the turn signal lever up, arrow 1.
Functional requirements
Deactivating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
▷
Automatic headlight control is activated.
▷
Low-beam headlights are switched on.
Activating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Additional settings"
5. "Automatic High Beams"
Press the turn signal lever forward, arrow 1,
or pull the turn signal lever backward when
the high-beam headlights are switched on, ar-
row 2.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low-
beam headlights are switched on.
When the Automatic High Beam Assistant is
deactivated via iDrive, the operation with the
turn signal lever is not possible.
The headlights are automatically changed be-
tween low-beam headlights and high-beam
headlights.
165
Light and view
CONTROLS
to use the high-beam headlights. When appro-
priate, dim the high beams manually.
Sensitivity of the Automatic High
Beam Assistant
The system may not be fully operational in
the following situations, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
General information
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant can be adjusted.
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
Safety information
▷
When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
Warning
If adjustments have been made or the sen-
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. If
adjustments have been made and the sen-
sitivity has been modified, make sure that
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
Switch off the high-beam headlights man-
ually if required.
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-
ing traffic on highways.
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs.
When the windshield in the area in front
of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or
covered with stickers, etc.
Exterior lighting
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
Setting at standstill only.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
Light is turned off.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Increasing sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system responds more sensitively.
Resetting the sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front again
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-
ready state.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.
System limits
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot
replace the driver's personal judgment of when
166
Light and view
CONTROLS
Icon
Function
Driving lights automatic
Exterior lighting menu.
Principle
The low-beam headlights are switched on and
off automatically depending on the ambient
brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight
or if there is precipitation.
Automatic headlight control.
Low-beam headlights.
Exterior lighting off.
Exterior lighting off.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be turned on.
If the low-beam headlights are switched on
manually, the automatic headlight control is
deactivated.
Functions via iDrive
Icon
Function
Automatic headlight control.
Activate automatic headlight control
Press the button on the light switch.
Low-beam headlights.
Parking lights.
The icon in the button illuminates green.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low-
beam headlights are switched on.
Exterior lighting off.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot re-
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-
tions.
Left roadside parking light.
Right roadside parking light.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn
the lights on manually.
Buttons on the vehicle key
Parking lights, low-beam
headlights and roadside
parking lights
Icon
Function
Interior lighting.
Parts of the exterior lighting.
General information
Pathway lighting.
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting
167
Light and view
CONTROLS
is automatically switched off after a period of
time.
Low-beam headlights
Turning on low-beam headlights
Parking lights
Press the button on the light switch.
General information
The parking lights can only be turned on at low
speeds.
The low-beam headlights illuminate when
drive-ready state is switched on.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
Turning on parking lights
1.
Apps menu
Press the button again to switch on the low-
beam headlights when the standby state is
switched on.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Parking light"
Turning off low-beam headlights
Depending on the national-market version, the
low-beam headlights can be turned off in the
low speed range:
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle
battery and it would then be impossible to
switch on drive-ready state.
▷
Press the button on the light switch.
▷
▷
Press and hold the button on the
light switch.
Turn off light via iDrive.
Turning off parking lights
The following options are available to turn off
the parking lights:
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-
side parking light can be switched on.
▷
▷
Press the button on the light switch.
1.
Apps menu
Press and hold the button on the
light switch.
2. "Vehicle"
▷
▷
Turn off light via iDrive.
3. "Exterior lighting"
Turn on drive-ready state.
4. "Left roadside parking light" or "Right
roadside parking light"
After the drive-ready state is switched on,
the automatic headlight control will be acti-
vated.
168
Light and view
CONTROLS
Welcome Light Carpet
Welcome lights
Principle
The welcome light turns on automatically for
a limited period of time when approaching or
unlocking the vehicle.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
The light source is located in the position indi-
cated.
Activating/deactivating welcome
light
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Pathway lighting
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
Principle
5. Depending on the equipment, select the
following setting:
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area
surrounding the vehicle.
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
lighting functions are turned on.
Switching pathway lighting on
▷
"BMW Iconic Glow"
▷
After switching off the drive-ready state,
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.
The radiator grille lighting can only be
adjusted when the vehicle is stationary
and the drive-ready state is switched
off.
▷
Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Turning on the welcome light
Setting the duration
▷
Automatically on approach.
1.
Apps menu
▷
During unlocking.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key
with the vehicle locked.
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "Pathway lighting"
Depending on the settings, the interior
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will
be turned on.
6. Select the desired setting.
The function is not available for the first
10 seconds after locking.
169
Light and view
CONTROLS
The adaptive lighting functions are active
when the drive-ready state is switched on.
Daytime driving lights
General information
The daytime driving lights illuminate when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Cornering light
Principle
Activating/deactivating daytime
driving lights
In some countries, daytime driving lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-
vate the daytime driving lights in front.
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional cornering
light is switched on that illuminates the inside
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below
a certain speed.
1.
Apps menu
General information
The cornering light is automatically switched
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,
where applicable, the use of turn signals.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-
tional-market version:
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
of the steering-wheel angle.
▷
▷
▷
"Daytime driving lights"
"Rear daytime driving lights"
"BMW Iconic Glow"
Adaptive headlight range
control
Adaptive lighting functions
The adaptive headlight range control feature
balances out acceleration and braking proc-
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.
Principle
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-
lumination of the road.
Instrument lighting
General information
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of
one system or multiple systems, depending on
the equipment version:
Functional requirement
The brightness can only be adjusted in dark-
ness and with turned on parking lights or low-
beam headlights.
▷
Cornering light.
Activating the adaptive lighting
functions
Setting the brightness
1.
Apps menu
Press the button on the light switch.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
The LED in the button illuminates.
170
Light and view
CONTROLS
4. "Cockpit brightness at night"
5. Select the desired setting.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Reading light"
Interior lighting
5.
Tap on the icon.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically
controlled.
Turning reading lights on/off
Using the button:
Press the button.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-
ing lights are located next to the interior lights
in the front and rear.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Reading light"
5. Tap the desired seat.
Interior lighting menu
Reading lights
The brightness of the reading lights can be
adjusted when they are turned on.
Changing settings
Depending on vehicle equipment, the bright-
ness can be individually adjusted for specific
seats.
Interior lights
1.
Apps menu
Turning interior lights on/off
Using the button:
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Reading light"
Press the button.
5. Tap the desired seat.
6. Select the desired settings.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle
can be switched on and off independently. The
button is located in the rear headliner.
171
Light and view
CONTROLS
5. "Background light" or "Accent lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's
interior.
Dynamic light
Certain situations, for example incoming calls
or obstacles detected when opening doors, are
indicated by light effects. If the ambient light is
disabled, the light effects are still displayed.
Activating/deactivating ambient
light
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
1.
Apps menu
3. "Interior lighting"
2. "Vehicle"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Lighting effects"
6. Select the desired setting.
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Ambient lighting"
Reduced for night drive
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
Turning ambient light on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
1.
Apps menu
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Reduced for night driving"
Selecting the color
The color of the ambient light can only be se-
lected in Personal Mode.
Speaker lighting
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Principle
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Color"
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
Turning speaker lighting on/off
The speaker lighting is switched on when the
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
172
Light and view
CONTROLS
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
Window wiper system
Safety information
Warning
▷
▷
▷
▷
Rest position of the wipers, position 0.
Rain sensor mode, position 1.
Normal wiper speed, position 2.
Fast wiper speed, position 3.
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
When the journey is interrupted with the win-
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey
continues, the wipers resume at their previous
speed.
The wiper speed can be reduced gradually to
protect the wiper motor from overheating.
Turning off the window wiper
system and flick wipe
NOTICE
The wiper blades can wear out or become
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry
window for a longer period of time. The wiper
motor can overheat. There is a risk of prop-
erty damage. Do not use the wipers when the
window is dry.
NOTICE
Press the lever down or forward.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
▷
Turning off: press the lever down, arrow 1,
until it reaches the 0 position.
▷
Flick wipe: press the lever down from the
0 position, arrow 1, and press the lever in
position 0 or position 1 forward, arrow 2.
The lever returns to its initial position when
released.
Turning on window wiper system
Rain sensor
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the
wiper operation depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
173
Light and view
CONTROLS
General information
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is a risk of property damage. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor in car washes.
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor.
▷
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
Activating rain sensor
Window washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Only use the window washer
system when the washer fluid will not freeze.
Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-
row 1.
Wiping operation is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not
start.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the washer pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not
use the washer system when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty.
Deactivating rain sensor
Press lever back into the 0 position.
174
Light and view
CONTROLS
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Cleaning the windshield
Folding out the wipers
1. Turn on standby state.
2. Push the wiper lever down or forward and
hold it until the wipers stop in an approxi-
mately vertical position.
Pull the lever.
The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-
shield directly in front of the wiper blade when
the wiper moves upward.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Principle
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the
windshield.
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-
tions.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
Folding in the wipers
1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.
2. Turn on standby state, then press the wiper
lever down or forward again and hold it.
Wipers return to their rest position and are
ready again for operation.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of property damage. Defrost
175
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Vehicle features and options
Additional information:
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Airbags
1
Front airbag, driver
Front airbag, front passenger
Head airbag
4
5
Side airbag
Knee airbag
2
3
Front airbags
Side airbag
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
protects the side of the body in the chest and
lap area.
The front airbag helps protect the driver and
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact
in which the seat belts alone would not provide
adequate protection.
Head airbag
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag
protects the head.
176
Safety
CONTROLS
shoulder rests against the backrest when
crossing the hands and the upper body
is as far back as possible while still main-
taining a comfortable grip on the steering
wheel.
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
collision events.
▷
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
Knee airbag
The availability of the knee airbag depends on
the national-market version.
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
There should be no additional persons, an-
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event
of a frontal impact.
▷
▷
Dashboard and windshield on the pas-
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not
attach brackets or cables, for instance for
navigation devices or mobile phones.
Protective effect
General information
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with
adhesive, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
Information on optimum protective
effect of the airbags
▷
▷
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the passenger's side as a storage area.
Warning
Keep storage compartments near the air-
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or
center armrest.
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as
intended and may cause additional injuries
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Follow the information on
achieving the optimum protective effect of the
airbag system.
▷
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,
or other objects on the front seats unless
they are specifically designed for seats with
integrated airbags.
▷
▷
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as
jackets over the backrests.
Do not modify individual components or
wiring. This also applies to steering wheel
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
▷
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.
Fasten the seat belts correctly.
▷
Do not disassemble the airbag system.
Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low
as possible when the airbag is deployed.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that
hands can be crossed over the steering
wheel. Select the settings so that the
177
Safety
CONTROLS
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-
ities may affect the air bag system; contact
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-
tion.
Malfunction
▷
Warning light does not illuminate
when drive-ready state is turned on.
▷
The warning light illuminates con-
tinuously.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-
ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle
checked immediately by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Operational readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
Setting the front seat positions
The power that deploys the driver's/front
passenger airbags depends on the position of
the driver's/front passenger seat.
Warning
Individual components can be hot after de-
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual components.
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-
spective message appears on the control dis-
play.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional deployment of
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as
intended despite the accident severity. There
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Additional information:
Seats, refer to page 106.
Automatic deactivation of
front passenger airbag
Principle
The automatic front passenger airbag deacti-
vation can detect if the front passenger seat is
occupied.
Display in the instrument cluster
The front passenger airbag is activated or de-
activated accordingly.
When drive-ready state is turned on,
the warning light in the instrument
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-
cating the operational readiness of the entire
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.
Safety information
Warning
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-
tion, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front pass-
enger seat. The entire seat surface must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury
178
Safety
CONTROLS
or danger to life. Make sure that the front
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-
well.
Indicator light, front passenger
airbag
The front passenger airbag indicator light in
the headliner indicates the operating state of
the front passenger airbag.
Functional requirements
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied
seat surface:
The light indicates whether the airbag is acti-
vated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
illuminates briefly and then indicates whether
the airbag is activated or deactivated.
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
Display
Function
▷
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that
can press against the seat from below.
The indicator light is contin-
uously illuminated when the
seat is not occupied or when a
child is detected on the seat in
a provided child restraint sys-
tem as intended. The airbag
on the front passenger's side
is not activated.
Sit upright in the seat with your back
against the backrest.
Sit down with your feet touching the floor.
Installing child restraint systems
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied
seat surface of the front passenger seat:
The indicator light does not il-
luminate when, for instance, a
correctly seated person of suf-
ficient size is detected on the
seat. The airbag on the front
passenger's side is activated.
▷
Pay attention to the specifications and the
operating and safety information of the
child restraint system manufacturer when
using child restraint systems.
▷
▷
Make sure that the seat surface of the child
restraint system rests as flat as possible on
the seat surface.
When the front passenger seat is occupied,
check the indicator light in the headliner before
and while driving.
Move the head restraint up or remove it to
ensure that the child restraint system rests
as flat as possible against the rear seat
backrest.
Fault of the automatic deactivation
system
For adolescents and adults, the front pass-
enger airbag may deactivate in certain seat
positions. In this case, the indicator light for
the front passenger airbag illuminates in the
headliner.
▷
Observe the maximum size of the child re-
straint system, for example to avoid possi-
ble touching the roof.
Before transporting a child on the front pass-
enger seat, refer to the safety information and
instructions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
In this case, change the seat position so that
the front passenger airbag activates and the
indicator light goes out.
More information: installation of child restraint
systems, refer to page 122.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear seat.
179
Safety
CONTROLS
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Occupancy detection
The occupant detection system satisfies the
legal requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and deactivates
the front passenger airbag under certain con-
ditions.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Collision warning systems
General information
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has
different systems that can help prevent the risk
of imminent collision.
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-
tervention, refer to page 181.
▷
▷
▷
Exit warning, refer to page 190.
Sensors
Lane departure warning, refer to page 192.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intelli-
gent Safety systems are controlled by the fol-
lowing sensors:
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 195.
▷
▷
Side collision mitigation, refer to page 198.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Rear-end collision preparation, refer to
page 199.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷
Traffic Light And Sign Warning, refer to
page 200.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Wrong way warning, refer to page 202.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
No Turn on Red function, refer to
page 203.
Turning on/turning off collision
warning systems
▷
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to
page 204.
Depending on national-market version, some
of the systems are automatically activated
whenever you start driving.
Safety information
The following functions are adjustable.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. Select the desired settings.
180
Safety
CONTROLS
Resetting the settings
The settings of the collision warning systems
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle
outbound delivery.
Forward Collision Mitigation
with brake intervention
Principle
1.
Apps menu
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help
prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be
avoided, the system can help reduce the se-
verity of the accident.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Reset to recommended settings"
The system can issue a warning of a possible
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
System limits
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the For-
ward Collision Mitigation system includes the
following functions:
Safety information
Warning
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Warning function in rear-end collision situa-
tions, refer to page 184.
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Warning function for oncoming traffic, refer
to page 185.
Warning function for turning with oncoming
traffic, refer to page 186.
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to
page 187.
Warning function at intersections, refer to
page 188.
Detection capability
The system's detection capability is limited.
Evasion Assistant, refer to page 189.
The system only takes into account objects
that are located in the detection range of the
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
tem.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
181
Safety
CONTROLS
Warning
Turning on system manually
The system is activated by setting the warning
time.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Additional information:
Setting the warning time, refer to page 182.
Turning system off manually
Depending on national-market version, the ad-
justment can only be made when the vehicle is
at a standstill or in a very low speed range.
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed
successively on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
Sensors
2. "Vehicle"
Depending on the equipment, the system is
controlled by the following sensors:
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
7. "Off"
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
Speed range
The system issues a warning of a possi-
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.
3 mph/5 km/h.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
7. Select the desired setting.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
Some functions are deactivated earlier.
The more sensitive the warning time is set to
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The
system can therefore also issue more early or
unfounded warnings and reactions.
The system is enabled as soon as the speed
drops below these values again.
Turning the Forward Collision
Mitigation on/off
The system checks for visual impairments. De-
pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster
captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility
and field of vision also affect the timing of the
warnings.
Turning on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
182
Safety
CONTROLS
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
diately.
Display in the instrument cluster
The following indicator lights and warning
lights are shown on the instrument cluster and,
depending on vehicle equipment, on the Head-
up display:
▷
▷
A warning signal sounds:
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
diately.
Automatic brake intervention:
Icon
Meaning
Depending on the equipment and situation
in case of risk of imminent collision, the
system can also intervene with an auto-
matic brake intervention and automatically
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a
complete stop.
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a
pedestrian.
Risk of collision, for instance with an
oncoming or a vehicle driving ahead.
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle
is used.
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle
crossing from the right.
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle
crossing from the left.
Automatic brake intervention
In case of a risk of collision, the system can
assist with an automatic brake intervention, if
necessary.
General risk of collision.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
The corresponding indicator lights and warn-
ing lights may display differently if the system
detects multiple objects.
During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic
Stability Control activates automatically.
A brake intervention can be canceled by de-
pressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively
steering.
Warning function
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-
spective hazardous situation.
Depending on the equipment and situation,
the brake intervention can occur up to approx.
155 mph/250 km/h.
In the event of a prewarning, a warning light
illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-
ing, a warning light flashes red and a warning
tone sounds.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
only a brief brake intervention will occur.
In the event of a system warning, the driver
must intervene immediately and in accordance
with the situation.
▷
Red warning light illuminates:
A hazardous situation has been detected.
Increased awareness is required.
▷
Red warning light flashes:
183
Safety
CONTROLS
System limits
Warning function in forward
collision situations
Safety information
Principle
Warning
The warning function in forward collision situa-
tions warns of a possible risk of collision and
may brake independently.
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General information
Detection capability
The system's detection capability is limited.
The system only takes into account objects
that are located in the detection range of the
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
tem.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings
may vary with the current driving situation.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-
dling when responding. If an active driving
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-
tions occur less frequently.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
▷
▷
In tight curves.
With limitation of the driving stability control
systems.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
▷
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
Also, do not use Forward Collision Mitigation
when towing.
184
Safety
CONTROLS
General information
Icon
Meaning
Forward Collision Warning with a de-
tected vehicle.
General risk of collision.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 181.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings
may vary with the current driving situation.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
or only detected with a delay, for instance:
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-
proached at high speed.
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
Icon
Meaning
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-
hicle is detected.
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
General risk of collision.
Warning function for
oncoming traffic
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Principle
The warning function for oncoming traffic can
warn of a possible risk of collision with oncom-
ing vehicles and may brake independently.
In case of a possible risk of collision, a brake
intervention is triggered.
Additional information:
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 181.
185
Safety
CONTROLS
System limits
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
Icon
Meaning
Oncoming traffic warning when a ve-
hicle is detected.
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.
Vehicles with an unusual front view.
General risk of collision.
Warning function for turning
with oncoming traffic
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Principle
There is a risk of an accident with oncom-
ing vehicles when turning across the oncom-
ing lane. The system can issue a warning of
a possible risk of collision and activate the
brakes independently, if needed.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 181.
System limits
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
General information
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷
▷
▷
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.
Vehicles that are hidden by other vehicles.
Vehicles with an unusual front view.
Upper speed limit
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The system is active when the own speed is
below approx. 15 mph/25 km/h.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with oncoming vehicles at speeds
from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit-
uation.
186
Safety
CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected pe-
destrian or cyclist, a warning light is displayed.
Warning function for
pedestrians
Icon
Meaning
Principle
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a
pedestrian.
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-
ies, the warning function warns the driver of a
possible risk of collision with pedestrians and
cyclists. The system may brake automatically.
General risk of collision.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
General information
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 181.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range when on a straight line.
Detection range
The detection range consists of the following
parts:
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range when turning.
▷
▷
Area in front of the vehicle, arrow 1.
The system issues a warning of a possible
risk of collision with pedestrians or cyclists at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
With side radar sensors in front: side areas,
arrows 2.
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
187
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-
sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-
fic is detected.
Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of their contour or posture.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-
sors to detect.
The timing of warnings may vary with the cur-
rent driving situation.
Upper speed limit
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
system responds to pedestrians and cyclists
when your vehicle speed is less than approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Warning function at
intersections
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
Principle
Icon
Meaning
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-
ies, the Intersection Collision Warning function
can warn the driver of a possible risk of colli-
sion with crossing traffic at intersections and
junctions. The system may brake automati-
cally.
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
from the right.
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
from the left.
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General risk of collision.
General information
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 181.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
Vehicles crossing your driving direction can be
detected by the system as soon as these vehi-
cles enter into detection range of the sensors.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
188
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,
e.g. by buildings.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
▷
▷
Vehicles with an unusual side view.
Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-
tions.
Functional requirements
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.
Upper speed limit
The system responds to crossing vehicles
when the vehicle speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
▷
Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
vehicle.
Speed range
The Evasion Assistant helps the driver
when the vehicle speed is between approx.
19 mph/30 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.
Evasion Assistant
Principle
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle or detected person, e.g., a pedestrian,
a warning light is displayed.
The Evasion Assistant can help the driver per-
form evasive maneuvers in certain situations,
e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians appear
suddenly.
Icon
Meaning
General information
Warning when a vehicle is detected.
Risk of collision with a pedestrian.
Risk of collision with unknown obsta-
cle.
Warning function with evasion
support
If the vehicle approaches another object at a
high differential speed, a warning is displayed
if there is an immediate risk of collision.
The system issues a warning and intervenes
to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-
neuver is possible.
Sensors monitor and detect the clearance in
front of the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, the areas next to the vehicle are
also monitored.
Intervene in case of a warning.
The system is designed to provide assistance
during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk
of collision.
If the system detects sufficient free space
alongside the vehicle, it helps the driver per-
form an evasive maneuver safely.
A message in the instrument cluster and, de-
pending on the equipment, in the Head-up dis-
play signals the evasion support.
189
Safety
CONTROLS
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
monitored as well. Two additional radar sen-
sors are located in the front bumper.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
The system monitors the vehicle's surround-
ings for a limited time after you get in or park.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
A possible risk of collision is indicated by vari-
ous warning functions.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-
proached at high speed.
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
Sensors
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of their contour or posture.
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-
sors, side, front.
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-
sors to detect.
Turning the exit warning on/off
Exit warning
Turning on the system automatically
The exit warning activates automatically after
departure if the function was switched on at
the completion of the last trip.
Principle
The exit warning helps to avoid accidents.
The system can warn the occupants when
they are opening the doors and a risk of colli-
sion with approaching objects is detected.
Turning system off manually
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Exit warning"
General information
7. Select the desired setting.
Depending on national-market version, this
system activates automatically at the start of
every drive.
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
190
Safety
CONTROLS
Ambient light
Adjusting the exit warning
Depending on the equipment, warnings are
also indicated by the ambient light in the inte-
rior.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Exit warning"
Warning function
Prewarning
In the event of an advance warning, the warn-
ing light in the exterior mirror illuminates. De-
pending on the equipment, the ambient light
also flashes.
7. Select the desired setting.
Depending on national-market version, it may
not be possible to configure the Exit Warning.
An object was detected in the opening area.
Increased awareness is required.
Turning the warning signal on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Acute warning
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Exit warning"
In the event of an acute warning, the warn-
ing light in the exterior mirror flashes, as does
the ambient light, depending on vehicle equip-
ment. In addition, a signal tone sounds.
There is a risk of collision when opening the
doors.
7. "Warning tone"
Depending on national-market version, the
warning tone cannot be turned off.
System limits
Displays
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Warning light in exterior mirror
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷
▷
▷
Fully or partially hidden objects.
Stationary or very slow objects.
Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
191
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
The speed of an approaching vehicle is too
fast or too slow.
Safety information
▷
▷
In curves.
Warning
In case of fully or partially hidden objects.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
road and traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate Do not jerk the steering
wheel in response to a warning.
Lane Departure Warning
with active return
Principle
The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the
lane.
Warning
An automatic steering intervention helps to
keep the vehicle in its lane.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
General information
Functional requirement
The camera must detect the lane boundaries
for the lane departure warning to be active.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The areas of the sensors must be clean and
clear.
The system issues a warning starting at a min-
imum speed. The minimum speed is country-
specific and displayed on the control display.
Sensors
Various warning functions from this system
help the driver keep their vehicle in their lane.
Depending on the equipment, the system is
controlled by the following sensors:
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-
fore exiting the lane.
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Radar sensor, side, front.
192
Safety
CONTROLS
lane marking, a warning is issued. The
system performs a steering intervention.
Turning the Lane Departure
Warning on/off
▷
"In dangerous situations"
Turning on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
Broken road lines: If the system detects
that the vehicle is about to inadvertently
cross a lane marking, or if the sensors
detect an oncoming vehicle, a warning
is issued and a steering intervention is
performed.
Turning on system manually
Depending on national-market version,
with continuous lane markings: If the
system detects that your vehicle is
about to inadvertently leave your lane
or cross a lane marking, a warning is is-
sued and a steering intervention is per-
formed.
The system is activated by the selected warn-
ing setting.
Additional information:
Configuring the warning, refer to page 193.
Turning system off manually
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, you must successively confirm
the switch-off on the control display.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1.
Apps menu
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. "Off"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Setting Lane Departure Warning
Depending on the national-market
version: turning steering intervention
on/off
Configuring the warning
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
1.
Apps menu
3. "Driving settings"
2. "Vehicle"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. "Steering intervention"
▷
"Expanded"
If the system detects that your vehicle
is about to leave your lane or cross a
193
Safety
CONTROLS
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention is automatically active af-
ter every driving off.
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-
responding direction before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued.
Steering intervention
Display in the instrument cluster
Depending on the equipment and the national-
market version: if a lane marking is crossed in
the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the
system intervenes with a brief active steering
intervention in addition to vibrating. The sys-
tem supports the driver in keeping the vehicle
within the lane. The steering intervention can
be noticed on the steering wheel and can be
manually overridden at any time.
Different system statuses are displayed on
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle
equipment and national-market version.
Icon
Meaning
Indicator light flashes green: System
is actively issuing a warning. If neces-
sary, the system performs a steering
intervention.
During an active steering intervention, a light is
displayed on the instrument cluster.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
For instance, the steering intervention will be
suppressed in the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.
When flashing.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 159.
With hazard warning system switched on.
In driving situation with high driving dynam-
ics.
Warning function
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
General information
Different warnings are issued by the Lane De-
parture Warning system, depending on situa-
tion and speed:
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.
Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
▷
Indicator lights and warning lights on the
instrument cluster.
End of warning
For instance, the warning or an active steering
intervention will be canceled in the following
situations:
▷
▷
▷
Vibration of steering wheel.
Steering intervention.
Warning tone.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.
When returning to your own lane.
With hard accelerating or braking.
With hazard warning system switched on.
When flashing.
Steering wheel vibration
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration
setting.
Additionally, a light is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster.
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
194
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
▷
▷
▷
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
When another driver assistance system is
activated, if applicable.
While Dynamic Stability Control is limited.
▷
▷
No lane boundaries detected.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited. A yellow warning
light also illuminates, depending on national-
market version.
When the system limits are reached.
Warning signal
A warning tone sounds if the driver does
not actively steer after the Lane Departure
Warning system has performed multiple active
steering interventions within one minute.
Active Blind Spot Detection
with active return
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-
played.
Principle
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane.
The warning tone and Check Control message
advise the driver to pay closer attention to their
lane.
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives
warnings at different levels.
The longer warning tone is stopped if the
driver takes control of the steering.
An automatic steering intervention helps to
keep the vehicle in its lane.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
General information
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a
minimum speed.
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
The minimum speed is country-specific and
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection
menu.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
The system indicates whether there are vehi-
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The
195
Safety
CONTROLS
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates
dimly.
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot
Detection
The system will warn in the previously named
situations prior to a lane change. The warn-
ing light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
Configuring the warning
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
When turning at a speed of up to approx.
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not
vibrate.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. Select the desired setting.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
Sensors
1.
Apps menu
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
2. "Vehicle"
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-
sors, side, front.
Functional requirement
The areas of the sensors must be clean and
clear.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
Depending on the national-market
version: turning steering intervention
on/off
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection
on/off
1.
Apps menu
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. Select the desired setting.
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. "Steering intervention"
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the system activates automati-
cally whenever you start driving.
196
Safety
CONTROLS
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-
den at any time.
Warning function
Warning light in exterior mirror
The steering intervention is carried out from
a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-
played on the control display.
Warning light flashing
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing
purposes.
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Prewarning
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot
or approaching from the rear.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
Acute warning
When an acute warning occurs, the steering
wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the
exterior mirror flashes brightly.
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.
An acute warning is issued if the following con-
ditions are met:
Displaying warnings
▷
▷
▷
Another vehicle is located in the critical
area.
The number of warnings shown depends on
how the settings are configured. However,
there may also be an excess of unwarranted
warnings of critical situations.
Your own vehicle is approaching the other
lane.
Depending on the system setting when the
turn signal is turned on.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area.
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
Steering intervention
Depending on the national-market version:
when there is no response to the vibration
of the steering wheel at speeds of up to
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking
is crossed, the system engages the active
steering intervention. The steering intervention
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
for instance by stickers.
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention e.g. in the following situa-
tions:
197
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid a col-
lision. For this purpose, the system issues a
warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mir-
ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating
steering wheel. If necessary, an active steering
intervention is performed by the system.
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷
▷
If the camera is impaired.
Functional requirement
The camera behind the windshield determines
the lane boundary positions.
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited. A yellow warning
light also illuminates, depending on national-
market version.
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision mitigation with steering inter-
vention to be active.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Side collision mitigation
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Principle
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an
impending side collision.
Turning the side collision warning
on/off
General information
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Side collision warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the
vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum
speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1.
Apps menu
The minimum speed is country-specific and
displayed on the control display.
2. "Vehicle"
If, for example, another vehicle is detected next
to your vehicle and there is a risk of collision
3. "Driving settings"
198
Safety
CONTROLS
4. "Driver Assistance"
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-
den at any time.
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
System limits
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Display in the instrument cluster
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-
ment cluster.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
Additional information:
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
Assisted View, refer to page 159.
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
Warning function
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
Warning light in exterior mirror
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited.
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
Rear-end collision
preparation
Acute warning
If there is a risk of collision, the warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering
wheel starts vibrating.
Principle
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-
hind.
A Check Control message is displayed at the
same time.
Steering intervention
Depending on the national-market version,
if necessary, the system engages the active
steering intervention to prevent a collision and
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The
199
Safety
CONTROLS
Functional limitations
General information
This function may be restricted if the speed
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or
similar to your own speed.
Traffic Light And Sign
Warning
Principle
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-
hicle.
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning provides
support in situations in which the right-of-way
needs to be yielded based on road signs or
traffic lights.
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
certain speed, the system can react as follows:
▷
Where applicable, the hazard warning
flashers will be switched on.
General information
The system evaluates traffic signs and traffic
lights using a camera behind the windshield.
▷
Where applicable, the PreCrash functions
are triggered.
The navigation system directs information on
the road layout to the system.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
A warning is given if the right of way is about
to be violated, e.g., in the following traffic situa-
tions:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
At an intersection.
Sensors
At a road entrance.
The system is controlled by the radar sensors
on the sides and rear.
On a highway entrance ramp.
At a roundabout.
Turning rear-end collision
preparation on/off
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
With a red traffic light.
The system issues a warning as from a vari-
able minimum speed and at speeds up to ap-
prox. 60 mph/100 km/h.
The system is deactivated when reversing.
The following traffic signs are taken into ac-
count for the Traffic Light And Sign Warning:
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
200
Safety
CONTROLS
4. "Driver Assistance"
Sign Meaning
Give way signs:
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
A pre-warning is issued for these
road signs.
The selected setting is saved and adopted for
the next journey.
Stop signs:
A pre-warning is issued for these
road signs.
Warning function
When traffic lights are red, a pre-
warning and an acute warning will be
issued.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning:
▷
▷
Prewarning: visual warning by an icon in
the instrument cluster.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Acute warning: visual warning by an icon
in the instrument cluster and an additional
acoustic signal.
Functional requirement
The right-of-way situation ahead of the vehicle
must be clearly controlled by traffic signs or
light signal systems.
The timing of the warning varies with the ac-
tual driving situation and the warning time set-
ting.
Prewarning
If there is a risk that a right of way is about to
be violated, one of the following icons appears
in the instrument cluster:
Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
Icon
Meaning
Turning the Traffic Light And Sign
Warning on/off
Give way.
1.
Apps menu
Stop.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Traffic Light and Sign Warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Red traffic light.
When a prewarning is issued, intervene as
appropriate for the situation; for example, by
braking.
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
Acute warning
2. "Vehicle"
If there is an acute risk that the right of way
is about to be violated, an acoustic signal will
3. "Driving settings"
201
Safety
CONTROLS
sound and one of the following icons will ap-
pear in the instrument cluster:
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the
standard.
When traffic signs are detected that apply
to a junction or parallel street.
Icon
Meaning
Red traffic light.
In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
With intersections with flashing light signal
systems.
When an acute warning is issued, intervene as
appropriate for the situation; for example, by
braking.
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
Display in the Head-up display
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Head-up display and in the instrument cluster.
In some regions, the system may not be
available or only partially available.
System limits
Wrong way warning
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Principle
The wrong way warning warns the driver of
an upcoming wrong entry onto roads, for in-
stance onto freeways, roundabouts and one-
way streets.
No warning
The system does not issue a warning in the
following situations, for example:
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the sys-
tem uses navigation data and traffic signs to
check the traffic situation.
▷
▷
In right-of-way situations without right-of-
way signs, stop signs, or red light signal
systems.
With intersections with relevant traffic lights
that are illuminated yellow or green.
For example, the system takes the following
traffic signs into account:
▷
▷
▷
No entrance.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
Roundabout.
Directional arrows: mandatory bypass.
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-
clear.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
fully or partially concealed or soiled.
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
difficult to read or rotated.
Functional requirement
The road layout ahead must be controlled
clearly with traffic signs.
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
too small or too large.
202
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When traffic signs are detected that apply
to a junction or parallel street.
Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-
ready state using the Start/Stop button.
Turning wrong way warning on/off
Depending on national-market version, the
wrong way warning is automatically activated
whenever you start driving.
In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
It may not be possible to use the system in
all regions.
Warning function
A warning is displayed and a signal
tone sounds, for example when the ve-
hicle is traveling in the wrong direction
on a highway, roundabout or one-way street.
No Turn on Red function
Principle
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-
ter and, depending on the equipment, in the
Head-up display.
This function provides assistance to the driver
at traffic lights where turning on red is prohib-
ited.
To do so, this function analyzes traffic lights
and traffic signs using the camera behind the
windshield. In addition, the navigation system
data is used.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
No warning
For example, the system does not issue a
warnings for road layouts without traffic signs.
Functional requirements
▷
The system detects the right-of-way situa-
tion ahead by analyzing traffic lights and
traffic signs.
Functional limitations
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect wrong way warning or no warning
at all:
▷
▷
Vehicle is less than approx. 164 ft/50 m
from the traffic lights.
Depending on vehicle equipment: the Traf-
fic Light And Sign Warning is turned on.
▷
▷
When the signage is not clear.
If the traffic signs are fully or partially con-
cealed or soiled.
Sensors
▷
If the traffic signs are poorly legible or ro-
tated.
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
▷
▷
If the traffic signs are too small or too large.
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the
standard.
203
Safety
CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster
Emergency Stop Assistant
If the driver approaches a red traffic
light with a traffic sign that prohibits
a turn on red, an indicator light is dis-
played on the instrument cluster.
Principle
If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle
safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to
bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.
The indicator light goes out automatically after
you drive off at a speed greater than approx.
9 mph/15 km/h.
General information
The Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered au-
tomatically.
System limits
When the system is triggered, the vehicle is
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
lane keeping.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Safety information
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
not be detected in time. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Make
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
If road signs or light signal systems are un-
clear.
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
fully or partially concealed or soiled.
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
difficult to read or rotated.
If traffic signs or light signal systems are
too small or too large.
If the traffic signs do not correspond to the
standard.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
The Emergency Stop Assistant is activated
via iDrive.
With intersections with flashing light signal
systems.
The system is activated from a speed of
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.
In the case of navigation data that is inva-
lid, outdated or not available.
The Driver Attention Camera detects driver
activity.
In some regions, this function may not be
completely available or not available at all.
Triggering the Emergency Stop
Assistant
If the system detects that the driver is no
longer driving the vehicle safely or ignores
warnings, the Emergency Stop Assistant is
triggered automatically. The triggered system
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
204
Safety
CONTROLS
The Emergency Stop Assistant can also be
triggered via voice input.
▷
▷
By firmly countersteering.
By changing the selector lever position
when the vehicle was already at a stand-
still.
Additional information:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 55.
At standstill
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-
tem will carry out the following settings:
An immediate emergency call can be triggered
on the control display.
The following is performed automatically when
the Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered:
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
The interior lights are switched on.
▷
A display is shown on the instrument clus-
ter.
The central locking system is unlocked.
▷
The system takes over vehicle handling un-
til the vehicle comes to a standstill.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is switched on.
Icon
Status
An emergency call is triggered when sta-
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.
Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-
gered.
Activating/deactivating Emergency
Stop Assistant
System limits
The system cannot replace the roadworthy
driving performance of a driver.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Emergency stop"
7. Select the desired setting.
The Emergency Stop Assistant may be re-
stricted in the following situations:
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-
ered by the steering wheel.
▷
With sunglasses with high protection from
infrared light.
Canceling Emergency Stop
Assistant
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-
sistant by actively taking control of driving the
vehicle throughout the entire process.
Cross Traffic Warning with
Braking
Principle
The system is stopped by the following ac-
tions, for example:
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-
proaching from the side are detected sooner
by the cross traffic warning than is possible
from the driver's seat.
▷
▷
By firmly pressing the accelerator pedal.
By stopping the system on the control dis-
play.
▷
▷
By operating the turn signal.
By turning off the hazard warning system.
205
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.
General information
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-
sors, side, front.
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic
Warning
The system must be activated on the control
display for the Cross Traffic Warning and brake
intervention to switch on automatically.
1.
Apps menu
The area behind the vehicle is monitored by
sensors.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
monitored as well.
The system indicates approaching road users.
6. Depending on the equipment, select the
following setting:
If there is a collision risk when reversing, the
system will provide assistance by performing
an automatic brake intervention.
▷
▷
▷
"Rear warning"
"Front and rear warning"
"Brake intervention at rear"
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning on the cross traffic warning
automatically
Safety information
The system must be activated on the control
display. The system turns on automatically as
soon as Park Distance Control or a camera
view activates and you engage a gear position.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Depending on the equipment, the front system
is turned on when a gear position is engaged.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active when the vehi-
cle is started.
Turning off the cross traffic warning
automatically
The system is automatically turned off in the
following situations:
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
206
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
When the speed exceeds walking speed.
Display in the Park Distance Control view
When a certain distance covered is ex-
ceeded.
Warning function
General information
The control display shows the corresponding
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-
ror flashes.
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are
detected by the sensors.
In case of a brake intervention, a message is
displayed on the control display and close after
a brief period of time.
Display in camera image
Visual warning
Warning light in exterior mirror
Depending on the direction of travel, the view
to the front or back is displayed in the camera
image.
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when
the vehicle is reversing.
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-
tected by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone
sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re-
spective direction.
Depending on the national-market version, the
signal tone will already sound when the gear
position is engaged.
207
Safety
CONTROLS
The function makes it possible to document
the accident or theft of the vehicle with the
corresponding recording type set.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
Manual storage of the recording.
This function is used to document traffic sit-
uations with the configured recording type.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
The assistance systems' cameras are used to
record, e.g., Panorama View.
Functional limitations
The function can be limited, for instance in the
following situations:
Additionally, the following parameters are
stored for the trip:
▷
▷
In tight curves.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Date.
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow
or a very fast speed.
Time.
Vehicle speed.
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in
the capture range of the sensors.
Global Positioning System coordinates.
Data protection
BMW Drive Recorder
The permissibility of recording and using video
recordings is contingent upon the statutory
regulations of the country in which the system
is to be used. The user is responsible for the
use of the system and compliance with respec-
tive applicable regulations.
Principle
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to
document surrounding traffic.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
constraints on use of the system in your state
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,
the laws with respect to use of the system
should be verified in regular intervals, espe-
cially when borders are frequently crossed.
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed
about the system. In addition, information
about the system is required when handing off
the vehicle.
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Functional requirements
▷
Standby state or drive-ready state is
switched on.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
Privacy Policy was accepted.
Recording type was selected.
Recording time was selected.
General information
Video recordings can be saved in different
ways:
▷
Automatic storage of the recording.
208
Safety
CONTROLS
Theft notification:
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic
recording may be taken.
▷
The theft notification was activated in the
Data Protection menu or in the Drive Re-
corder menu.
Manual recording
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.
Using the button
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-
vice.
▷
▷
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-
Drive account.
Privacy Policy was accepted.
Activating/deactivating the BMW
Drive Recorder
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated
before the first use of the recording function.
Press and hold this button.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
Via iDrive
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. Accept Privacy Policy.
5. "Settings"
Start the recording:
1.
Apps menu
6. "Allow recording"
7. Select the desired setting.
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recording"
Recording functions
5. "Start recording"
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".
Automatic recording
The recording is automatically stored when the
vehicle sensors detect an accident or theft.
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-
onds before and after storage is triggered.
▷
In case of accident:
Recording playback and
administration
Stored video recordings can be played back,
exported and deleted.
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-
onds before and after storage is triggered.
▷
In case of theft:
Depending on the selected recording dura-
tion, the system saves the recording after it
has been triggered.
For your own safety, the video recording is
only displayed on the control display up to ap-
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market
versions, the video recording is only displayed
When the alarm system is triggered, a mes-
sage is sent to the My BMW App.
After saving the recording, the reduced
quality video can be downloaded to a mo-
bile device.
209
Safety
CONTROLS
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-
tor lever is in the P position.
To transfer recordings to a mobile device:
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, a mobile
device is connected to the vehicle via Wi-Fi
and Bluetooth audio, or a USB storage de-
vice is connected.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recordings"
▷
▷
▷
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-
vice.
5. Select desired recording.
6. If necessary, select camera.
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-
Drive account.
The My BMW App is permitted to access
your photo library.
Settings
Recording type
Recording
1.
Apps menu
The recording can be started and stopped
manually.
2. "All apps"
Start the recording:
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
1.
Apps menu
5. Select the desired setting.
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recording"
Recording time
1.
Apps menu
5. "Start recording"
Stop the recording: "Stop recording".
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
Cameras
5. Select the desired setting.
Different cameras can be selected.
1.
Apps menu
Recording on a mobile device
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
Principle
Depending on the equipment version, video
recordings can be stored directly on a mobile
device such as a smartphone or USB storage.
5. "Cam. selection"
6. Select desired camera.
General information
Depending on national-market version: The
storable video length depends on the mobile
device's available storage space.
System limits
In the event of serious accidents, it may not
be possible to store recordings if the damage
on the vehicle is too great or the power supply
was interrupted.
Functional requirements
If you repeatedly overwrite a USB drive, it may
not be possible to export recordings correctly.
▷
Privacy Policy was accepted.
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
210
Safety
CONTROLS
The preferred file system for USB storage is
NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.
Safety information
In case of theft, the recording is only stored au-
tomatically when the anti-theft warning system
has been triggered.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, critical situations might not be
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate
If the internet connection is weak or cannot be
established, theft alerts and video downloads
may be restricted or not available.
The quality of the Wi-Fi connection affects
whether recordings can be saved on your
smartphone. This function may be restricted or
not available if the connection is weak.
Function
Depending on the equipment and require-
ments, the following individual functions are
active in accident-critical driving situations:
Active Protection
Principle
▷
Automatic closing of the windows.
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
or collision situations.
The windows remain open with a small
gap.
▷
Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.
The sun protection is also closed.
Automatic closing of glass sunroof.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Active Protection consists of
various PreCrash functions.
▷
▷
Automatic positioning of the backrest for
the front passenger seat.
Systems can be returned to the desired set-
tings following a critical driving situation with-
out accident.
The system is used to detect certain critical
driving situations that might lead to an acci-
dent. This includes the following critical driving
situations:
▷
▷
▷
Emergency braking.
Severe understeering.
Severe oversteering.
PostCrash iBrake
Principle
Certain functions of several systems can,
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec-
tion triggering:
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a
standstill without intervention by the driver.
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation: automatic
brake intervention.
General information
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a
further collision and its consequences.
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation: brake booster.
Rear-end collision preparation: detection of
impending rear-end collisions.
211
Safety
CONTROLS
accident, injury, and property damage. Make
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically.
Harder vehicle deceleration
In certain situations, it may be necessary to
bring the vehicle to a stop more quickly than
automatic braking with PostCrash iBrake.
Break recommendation
Function
Once a drive is started, this function is trained
to the driver, enabling it to detect when the
driver is less alert or is fatigued.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
brake. The brake pressure will then be higher
than the brake pressure generated by auto-
matic braking. Automatic braking with Post-
Crash iBrake is canceled.
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-
ing criteria into account:
▷
▷
▷
Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
Abort automatic braking
It may be necessary to cancel PostCrash
iBrake automatic braking in certain situations,
e.g., when making an evasive maneuver.
Driving conditions, for instance time, length
of trip.
Depending on the equipment: attention
of the driver through the Driver Attention
Camera.
Abort automatic braking:
▷
By depressing the brake pedal for slightly
longer.
This function activates at speeds greater than
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display
a break recommendation.
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal for
slightly longer.
Setting break recommendation
The break recommendation can be switched
on, off and adjusted via iDrive.
Fatigue alert
1.
Apps menu
Principle
2. "Vehicle"
The Fatigue Alert break recommendation fea-
ture can detect when the driver is fatigued
or less alert during long, monotonous trips,
for instance on highways. This function recom-
mends taking a break.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Fatigue Alert"
7. Select the desired setting.
Safety information
Despite this function being off, some driver as-
sistance systems may issue break recommen-
dations.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
not be detected in time. There is a risk of
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the control display
with the recommendation to take a break.
212
Safety
CONTROLS
During the display, various settings can be se-
lected.
The steering wheel and driver’s seat height
must be adjusted so that the entire instrument
cluster is visible. This enables the Driver Atten-
tion Camera to record the driver’s entire face.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation
can only be displayed again after this time has
elapsed.
Overview
System limits
The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If
the system is limited, either no warning may
be issued or an unwarranted warning may be
issued.
The break recommendation function may be
limited in the following situations:
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-
ment cluster may have some infrared light
sources. Depending on the light conditions,
these light sources can be visible when the
vehicle is in standby mode.
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
In active driving situations such as when
changing lanes frequently.
System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
operational in the following situations:
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.
In the event of strong side winds.
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-
ered by the steering wheel.
Driver Attention Camera
▷
With sunglasses with high protection from
infrared light.
Principle
A camera in the instrument cluster monitors
the driver’s activity and, depending on the
equipment, the driver’s viewing direction.
General information
The assistance systems help drivers by ana-
lyzing whether they are paying attention, e.g.,
by evaluating their head position and eyes.
Functional requirements
For full operability, make sure that the field of
view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-
structed.
213
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
The brake assistant automatically applies
maximum braking assistance when the brake
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.
Additional information:
To make full use of braking assistance, do not
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during
full braking.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Antilock Braking System
Dynamic Stability Control
Principle
Principle
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking
of the wheels during the braking process.
Dynamic Stability Control helps keep the vehi-
cle on a steady course in critical driving situa-
tions. The drive power is reduced depending
on the situation, and wheels can be braked
individually.
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-
ing full braking, which increases active driving
safety.
General information
The Antilock Braking System is ready after
each time drive-ready state is turned on.
General information
The system detects the following unstable
driving conditions, for instance:
▷
▷
Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.
Malfunction
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
The warning light on the instrument
cluster illuminates.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Safety information
Warning
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-
ble.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
Steerability is limited during full braking.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
214
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Dynamic Stability Control is automatically acti-
vated when changing to another drive mode.
"SPORT": when you switch to this drive mode,
the last setting is automatically reactivated.
Warning
Displays in the instrument cluster
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in
critical driving situations. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. Drive
with roof load only with activated Dynamic
Stability Control.
View when Dynamic Stability
Control is deactivated.
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Stability Control is deactivated.
Overview
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the driving and
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to
the driving circumstances.
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Sta-
bility Control has failed or is initializing.
Driving stabilization is restricted or has
failed.
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
My Modes
Activating/deactivating Dynamic
Stability Control
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-
ing stability is restricted when accelerating and
cornering.
Setting for increased driving
dynamics
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
Principle
For a more dynamic driving experience, you
can configure the vehicle for increased driving
dynamics via My Modes.
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch mode"
3. "SPORT"
General information
The Dynamic Stability Control and thereby the
driving stability are limited during acceleration
and when cornering.
4. "Settings"
5. "Driving dynamics"
6. "DSC OFF"
215
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
If the suspension control system fails.
The vehicle has a flat tire.
Overview
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-
vention, refer to page 181.
Drive-off support
Principle
My Modes
The moving-off support offers the best possi-
ble traction when moving off in certain situa-
tions on difficult ground such as on snow or
sand.
Activating/deactivating increased
driving dynamics
General information
The function provides maximum drive power
with adapted driving stability in the low speed
range.
1.
Press the button.
2. "Switch mode"
3. "SPORT"
Activating/deactivating the drive-off
support
4. "Settings"
5. "Driving dynamics"
6. "SPORT PLUS"
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Dynamic Stability Control is activated when
changing to another drive mode.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "Drive-off support"
6. Select the desired setting.
"SPORT": the last setting applied to Dynamic
Stability Control remains saved in the mode.
Display in the instrument cluster
The drive-off support remains active until it is
deactivated or the driving mode is changed.
Indicator light illuminates: Increased
driving dynamics activated.
Display in the instrument cluster
If drive-off support is activated, the in-
dicator light illuminates on the instru-
ment cluster.
Automatic program change
The increased driving dynamics will be deacti-
vated automatically, for instance in the follow-
ing situations:
▷
▷
When the Distance Control is activated.
In case of a brake intervention by For-
ward Collision Mitigation. Deactivate For-
ward Collision Mitigation as necessary.
216
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
the steering wheel will result in a greater
wheel steering angle. As a result, the varia-
ble sports steering increases steering com-
fort by reducing the necessary steering ef-
fort.
BMW xDrive
Principle
BMW xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of
the vehicle. Concerted action by the BMW
xDrive and other suspension control systems
such as Dynamic Stability Control further opti-
mizes traction and driving dynamics.
▷
The wheel angle is reduced in situations
that require minor or rapid corrections of
the direction of travel when driving at higher
speeds, e.g., swerving quickly or correcting
for crosswinds. In these cases, the variable
sports steering increases driving stability
when moving the steering wheel.
General information
BMW xDrive variably distributes the drive
forces to the front and rear axles as required
by the driving situation and road conditions.
Integral Active Steering
Servotronic
Principle
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma-
neuverability of the vehicle and makes a more
direct steering response possible. Driving sta-
bility is also increased at high speeds.
Principle
Servotronic is a speed-dependent steering
support.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,
and makes steering firmer when driving at
faster speeds.
General information
Integral Active Steering combines variable
sport steering with active rear-wheel steering.
The rear-wheel steering acts to increase ma-
neuverability at low speeds by turning the rear
wheels slightly in the opposite direction to the
front wheels.
Setting
The steering force adapts to the drive mode
to convey a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable
steering response.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned
in the same direction as the front wheels. For
instance, this results in a harmonious lane
change.
Variable sport steering
In critical driving situations, integral active
steering can stabilize the vehicle by automat-
ically steering the rear wheels, for example e.g.
when oversteering.
The variable sports steering facilitates direct
and agile handling with little steering effort.
The variable sports steering responds inde-
pendently of the current speed, varying the
steering gear ratio in line with the steering an-
gle.
Setting
The system offers several different settings.
With the driving modes of the My Modes, the
system can be set to comfortable or dynamic.
▷
In situations that require large movements
of the steering wheel, e.g., when maneu-
vering or turning, even minor movements of
Additional information:
217
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
My Modes, refer to page 135.
Using snow chains
In order to guarantee free movement of the
wheels when operating with snow chains,
rear-wheel steering must be turned off when
snow chains are mounted.
Additional information:
Rear-wheel steering during operation with
snow chains, refer to page 339.
Malfunction
The warning light on the instrument
cluster illuminates.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The steering system may not be operational.
Integral Active Steering assistance may no lon-
ger be provided.
▷
▷
▷
Larger steering movements are required at
low speeds.
The response of the vehicle is more sensi-
tive in higher speed ranges.
Proceed cautiously and practice anticipa-
tory driving.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
218
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
Vehicle features and options Speed Limit Info
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
Speed Limit Info
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Principle
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if
necessary, the Head-up display.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as overhead sign posts.
Speed warning
Principle
The speed warning can be used to set a speed
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed
limit is exceeded.
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed
or ignored depending on the situation in the
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.
General information
The system may also show speed limits that
apply to routes that are not signposted if the
navigation system has current map data.
Another speed warning is given when the set
speed limit is exceeded again after it has drop-
ped by 3 mph/5 km/h.
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-
rent map data for the country in which the ve-
hicle is operated must be downloaded.
Settings
The Speed Limit Warning can be activated or
deactivated. In addition, the speed limit for the
warning can be configured.
For information on the current map version
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-
igation system chapter.
1.
Apps menu
Without map data, the system is subject to
certain technical limitations. Traffic signs with
speed limitations are detected and displayed
only. Speed limits due to entering towns/cities,
highway signs, etc., are not displayed. Speed
limits with extra traffic signs are always dis-
played.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
219
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Additional information:
Settings
▷
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Individual settings can be configured for Speed
Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is
exceeded or the permissible maximum speed
changes.
Safety information
1.
Apps menu
Warning
2. "Vehicle"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. Select the desired setting.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors
▷
Camera, refer to page 36.
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
Functional limitations
The system function may be limited and may
provide incorrect information in the following
situations:
Display
Speed Limit Info
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers, or paint.
Icon
Description
Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-
ard.
Current speed limit.
In areas that are not included in the naviga-
tion system map data.
Depending on the national-
market version, it is possible
to switch between the units of
measurement.
If navigation system map data is invalid,
outdated, or unavailable.
When roads deviate from the navigation
such as due to changes in road layout.
No data on current speed limit
available.
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
Warning signals
When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal
sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded
or the speed limit changes. The display also
flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.
In case of electronic traffic signs.
220
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-
lel road are detected.
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Speed control systems
Principle
The speed control systems provide support
when driving.
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the speed con-
trol systems include the following individual
systems.
Select the desired speed control
system.
Store current speed.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 223.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Set speed.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 240.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the individual systems are en-
hanced with additional functions.
Turning on/selecting speed control
systems
Some functions can be operated via voice con-
trol.
1.
Turn on: press the button.
Additional information:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 55.
2.
Select: when the system is active,
press the button repeatedly until the de-
sired speed control system is displayed in
the toolbar in the instrument cluster.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
221
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Continuing speed control systems
Icon
Speed control system
Press the button.
Cruise control.
Distance control.
Turning off speed control systems
automatically
The speed control systems turn off automati-
cally when the drive-ready state is turned off.
Assisted Driving Mode: Cruise Control
with Distance Control, Steering Assis-
tance with lane keeping.
Turning off speed control systems
manually
The activated system is shown in green.
The system is shown in white when the sys-
tem can be activated.
Press and hold this button.
The speed control systems are turned
off and the displays extinguish.
The system is grayed out if the system has
failed or if the functional requirements are not
met.
Adjusting speed values
Interrupting speed control systems
automatically
Depending on the system, speed control
systems are interrupted automatically, for in-
stance in the following situations:
Repeatedly press the rocker button on
the steering wheel up or down until the
desired value is set.
▷
▷
Each time the rocker button is pressed
to the resistance point, the set speed in-
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷
When moving from selector lever position D
to P, N, or R.
Each time the rocker button is pressed past
the resistance point, the set speed changes
by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
Display in the instrument cluster
"SPORT PLUS": the settings for increased
driving dynamics are activated.
Marking on speedometer
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-
ess.
A mark for the set speed ap-
pears on the speedometer.
Interrupting speed control systems
manually
▷
Green marking: system is ac-
tive.
▷
Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted.
▷
▷
Press the button.
▷
No marking: system is switched off.
Press button to select another
speed control system.
222
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Notifications
In addition to the respective indicator lights,
notifications are displayed for some functions.
The scope of notifications can be set.
Warning
1.
Apps menu
The use of the system can lead to an in-
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-
uations, for instance:
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.
With high traffic volume.
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
6. "Notifications"
7. Select the desired setting.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and prop-
erty damage. Only use the system if driving
at constant speed is possible.
Cruise Control
Principle
Warning
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
General information
The system can be activated starting at
20 mph/30 km/h.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle setting, the Cruise
Control settings can change under certain
conditions. For instance, the acceleration can
change depending on the driving mode.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
Safety information
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
Select the desired speed control
system.
223
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Adjusting the speed
Button Function
Store current speed.
Store/maintain speed
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Press the rocker button up or down
once while the system is stopped.
Set speed.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the set
speed.
Turning on the Cruise Control
In vehicles with distance control: change the
mode of the Cruise Control to Cruise Control
without distance control.
The saved speed is shown on the speedome-
ter.
When the Speed Limit Assistant is not active,
the current speed can also be stored by press-
ing a button:
Additional information:
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
Press the button.
In vehicles without distance control: turn on the
Cruise Control with the buttons on the steering
wheel.
Changing the speed
Repeatedly press the rocker button up
or down until the desired speed is set.
1.
If necessary, press the button.
If active, the displayed speed is stored
and the vehicle reaches the stored speed
when the road is clear.
2.
If necessary, press the button re-
peatedly until the Cruise Control is selected.
The maximum speed that can be set depends
on the vehicle.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
Press rocker button to resistance point and
hold: The vehicle accelerates or decelerates
without the accelerator pedal being pressed.
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
After the rocker button is released, the vehicle
maintains the final speed achieved. Pressing
the switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Sta-
bility Control activates when cruise control is
switched on.
Turning the speed control system
off/interrupting
The speed control system can be turned off or
canceled automatically or manually.
Additional information:
Speed control systems, refer to page 221.
224
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Continuing cruise control
Displays in the instrument cluster
At the stored speed
Marking on speedometer
▷
Green marking: system is ac-
tive, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
▷
Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi-
cates the stored speed.
▷
No marking: system is switched off.
Indicator light
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. The difference
between the current speed and the stored
speed should be as little as possible.
Indicator light green: system is active.
Press the button with the system inter-
rupted.
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on the equipment, some system
information can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
System limits
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.
When drive-ready state is switched off.
Depending on the driving mode, the vehicle
may exceed or drop below the set desired
speed in some situations; for instance, on
downhill or uphill grades.
At the current speed
Press the rocker button up or down to
continue cruise control at the current
speed.
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.
Speed Limit Assistant: at the
suggested speed
Distance control
When a speed is suggested, press the
button to accept the Cruise Control at
the suggested speed.
Principle
With the distance control, a distance to a vehi-
cle driving ahead can be adjusted in addition to
the Cruise Control.
225
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
General information
The system maintains the set speed on clear
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-
matically.
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that
selector lever position P is engaged.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-
uation allows.
▷
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
Otherwise, drive off independently such as by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-
ing the button for the speed setting on the
steering wheel.
Safety information
Warning
Risk of accident is greater when there is a
high speed differential to other vehicles, for
instance in the following situations:
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-
hicle at speed.
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
When approaching stationary vehicles at
speed.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Before leaving
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
226
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Overview
Turning on Cruise Control with
Distance Control
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
1.
If necessary, press the button.
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
2.
If necessary, press the button re-
peatedly until distance control is selected.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
Cruise Control with Distance Control is active.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
desired speed.
Select the desired speed control
system.
The selected distance to a vehicle driving
ahead is maintained.
Store current speed.
The indicator lights on the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Set speed.
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control activates when Distance Control is
switched on.
Sensors
Adjusting the speed
The speed can be set using the rocker button
on the steering wheel.
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Additional information:
Cruise control, refer to page 223.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Interrupting Cruise Control with
Distance Control automatically
The system is stopped automatically in the fol-
lowing situations, for example:
Application range
The system is best used on well-maintained
roads.
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-
ess.
The maximum speed that can be set is limited
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and
the vehicle equipment.
▷
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is disengaged.
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
The system can also be activated when sta-
tionary.
"SPORT PLUS": the settings for increased
driving dynamics are activated.
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control
when towing.
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
Driver's seat belt and driver's door are
opened.
227
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
The system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a
road with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
The mark on the speedometer
illuminates gray.
▷
▷
The detection range of the radar is im-
paired, for instance by contamination or
heavy precipitation.
The indicator light illuminates green.
After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
Cruise control can be continued as follows:
▷
Pressing the accelerator pedal.
Turning the speed control system
off/interrupting
The speed control system can be turned off or
canceled automatically or manually.
▷
Press the rocker button on the left
side of the steering wheel.
▷
Press the button on the left side of
the steering wheel.
Additional information:
Speed control systems, refer to page 221.
Distance
Continuing cruise control while
driving
Safety information
Warning
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, deceleration can be late. There
is a risk of accidents and risk of property
damage. Be aware of the surrounding traffic
situation at all times. Adjust the distance to
the traffic and weather conditions and main-
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly
by braking.
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. The difference
between the current speed and the stored
speed should be as little as possible.
Adjusting the distance
Additional information:
1.
Apps menu
Cruise control, refer to page 223.
2. "Vehicle"
Continuing cruise control while
vehicle is stationary
In certain situations, this system requires the
driver to confirm their intention to drive off.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Distance control"
The displays show the following:
228
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
7. "Distance"
6. "Distance control"
7. "Switch to Cruise Control"
8. Select the desired setting.
The setting is reset when the vehicle is parked.
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
Automatic adaptation of the distance
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version: the system can be set so that
the distance to the vehicle in front is automati-
cally adjusted within the set distance. The sys-
tem analyzes the traffic situation and ambient
conditions, e.g., poor visibility.
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
1.
Apps menu
Marking on speedometer
2. "Vehicle"
▷
Green marking: system is ac-
tive, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
▷
Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi-
cates the stored speed.
6. "Distance control"
7. "Situational distance control"
▷
No marking: system is switched off.
Changing between Cruise Control
with/without Distance Control
Indicator lights and warning lights
Icon
Description
Safety information
White indicator light:
No Distance Control because acceler-
ator pedal is being pressed.
Warning
The system does not react to traffic driv-
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There is a risk of accident,
injury, and property damage. Adjust the set
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
needed.
Indicator light illuminates green:
Vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle
has been detected ahead of you.
Indicator light flashes green:
Changing over the Cruise Control mode
Preceding vehicle has driven off.
Turning Cruise Control without distance control
on or off:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
229
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Distance too short.
Icon
Description
Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
Indicator light flashes gray:
Conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
System limits
The system was deactivated but ap-
plies the brakes until you actively
resume control by pressing on the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 36.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds:
Radar sensors, refer to page 37.
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
Detection range
Assisted View
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 159.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
Displays in the Head-up display
The detection capability of the system and the
automatic braking performance are limited.
Set speed
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be
detected.
Depending on the equipment, some system
information can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the follow-
ing situations:
Distance information
The icon is displayed when the dis-
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
The distance information is active in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷
▷
For cross traffic.
For oncoming traffic.
▷
Cruise Control with Distance Control
switched off.
▷
Display in the Head-up display selected.
Head-up display, refer to page 145.
230
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Merging vehicles
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-
erates you may compensate for it by briefly
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
pedal the system is reactivated and controls
speed independently.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
merges into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis-
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-
lected distance in certain situations, including if
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system
requests that the driver intervene by braking
and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.
Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.
In front of bumps in the road.
Cornering
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or making an evasive maneuver.
When the set speed is too high for a curve,
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a
curve at an appropriate speed.
Drive power
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be
detected very late.
Depending on the driving mode, the vehicle
may exceed or drop below the set desired
speed in some situations; for instance, on
downhill or uphill grades.
231
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 223.
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
Assisted Driving Mode
Principle
Overview
Assisted Driving Mode enhances Distance
Control with Steering Assistance and lane
keeping. The system assists the driver in keep-
ing the vehicle within the lane. For this pur-
pose, the system executes supporting steering
movements, for instance when cornering.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Turn last active speed control sys-
tem on/off.
General information
Depending on the speed, the system orients
itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi-
cles in front.
Interrupt and continue speed control
systems.
Select the desired speed control
system.
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Store current speed.
If a lane boundary is crossed, the system is-
sues a warning by vibrating the steering wheel.
The steering wheel vibration intensity can be
adjusted.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Set speed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
national-market version, the Driver Attention
Camera in the instrument cluster monitors the
driver's attention.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Safety information
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Warning
Depending on the equipment:
Radar sensors, side, front.
Depending on the equipment:
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Sensors in steering wheel.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
▷
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
national-market version: Driver Attention
Camera
Additional information:
▷
▷
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 213.
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts
also apply.
Additional information:
232
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Functional requirements
Stopping Assisted Driving Mode
automatically
The system interrupts the supporting steering
movements automatically, for example in the
following situations:
▷
Depending on the equipment: speed below
130 mph/210 km/h or 110 mph/180 km/h.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Sufficient lane width.
Hands on the steering wheel rim.
Sufficiently wide curve radius.
Drive in the center of the lane.
▷
Depending on the equipment: at a
speed above 130 mph/210 km/h or
110 mph/180 km/h.
The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
▷
▷
▷
▷
After releasing the steering wheel.
With strong steering intervention.
When leaving own lane.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Distance control is active.
Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.
Depending on the equipment:
Side-collision warning is active.
When the turn signal is switched on or, de-
pending on the vehicle equipment, when
the driver turns the steering wheel while the
turn signal is switched on.
▷
▷
When the lane is too narrow.
Switching on Assisted Driving Mode
If a lane boundary is not detected and there
is no vehicle driving in front.
▷
▷
The Cruise Control with Distance Control is
interrupted.
1.
If necessary, press the button.
The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-
tened.
2.
If necessary, press the button re-
peatedly until Assisted Driving Mode is se-
lected.
Indicator light illuminates gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
Indicator light illuminates gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The indicator light illuminates green.
Icon
Description
The system is active and helps to keep
the vehicle in the lane.
Indicator light illuminates gray:
The system is ready.
When the system is switched on, the Forward
Collision Mitigation and, depending on the
equipment, the side-collision warning are ac-
tive.
Indicator light illuminates green:
The system is activated.
The system supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
233
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Description
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
Icon
display area of the instrument cluster.
Warning light flashes yellow and
steering wheel vibrates:
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 159.
A lane boundary has been crossed.
Warning light illuminates yellow and
acoustic signal sounds:
Displays on the steering wheel
System interruption is imminent.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds:
The system is switched off or will be
interrupted very soon.
Warning light illuminates yellow:
Hands are not grasping the steering
wheel. The system is still active.
Similar to the instrument cluster views, the two
LEDs above the keypads illuminate.
Grab the steering wheel with your
hands.
The steering wheel displays can be turned on/
off.
Warning light illuminates red, acous-
tic signal sounds:
1.
Apps menu
The hands are not on the steering
wheel or, depending on the vehicle
equipment and national-market ver-
sion, the driver's line of sight is not di-
rected at the surrounding traffic. Sys-
tem interruption is imminent.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Light elements"
The system reduces the speed to a
standstill if applicable.
7. Select the desired setting.
It is possible that the system will
not execute any supporting steering
movements.
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on the equipment, the system in-
formation can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
Immediately grasp the steering wheel
with your hands and pay attention to
the surrounding traffic.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed if the Driver Attention Cam-
era detects that the driver is inattentive.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
234
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
6. "Vibration intensity"
Weather
7. Select the desired setting.
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
This setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
▷
Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane
boundaries.
System limits
▷
Short-term interruptions in case of already
detected vehicles and lane boundaries.
General information
The system cannot be activated or meaning-
fully used in certain situations.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or making an evasive maneuver.
Safety information
Lane Change Assistant
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Principle
The Lane Change Assistant helps when
changing lanes on multi-lane roads.
Lane changes can be triggered by operating
the turn signal lever.
General information
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode
sensors.
The Cruise Control and Distance Control alerts
also apply.
Additional information:
Safety information
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 223.
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 36.
Radar sensors, refer to page 37.
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 213.
Hands on the steering wheel
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering
wheel contact in the following situations:
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
the use of this function may be prohibited or
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and
local laws.
▷
▷
Driving with gloves.
Protective covers on the steering wheel.
235
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.
Additional information:
After a short time, Lane Change Assistant ini-
tiates a lane change.
After the lane change, the system helps keep
the vehicle in the new lane.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Functional requirements
Canceling a lane change
The lane change can be canceled by steering
movement into the opposite direction or by op-
erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode have been met.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
▷
▷
Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-
clists and with physical barriers to oncom-
ing traffic such as crash barriers.
Displays in the instrument cluster
A vehicle has been detected at a sufficient
distance behind your own vehicle since be-
ginning the drive.
Icon
Description
Steering wheel icon and lane change
arrow icon are green:
▷
▷
Crossable lane boundaries are detected.
The system performs a lane change
in the arrow direction.
Maximum speed approx.
110 mph/180 km/h.
Steering wheel icon is green and line
for lane marking on respective side is
gray:
▷
The minimum speed is country-specific.
Turning on/turning off Lane Change
Assistant
1.
The system detected the lane change
request. Lane change not currently
possible.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
6. "Assisted Driving"
7. "Lane Change Assistant"
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 159.
Changing lanes
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits
changing lanes.
System limits
The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode system
apply.
2. Start the lane change.
▷
To initiate the lane change, press the
turn signal lever in the desired direction
to the resistance point.
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
the turn signal lever can also be pressed
beyond the resistance point.
236
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Additional information:
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
Automatic Lane Change
Assistant
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
the use of this function may be prohibited or
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and
local laws.
Principle
The Automatic Lane Change Assistant pro-
vides assistance when changing lanes and
passing on multi-lane roads.
In addition, the information on Assisted Driving
Mode and Assisted Driving Mode Plus applies.
Depending on the speed and traffic situation,
the Lane Change Assistant can perform an au-
tomatic lane change.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
If the Automatic Lane Change Assistant de-
tects an opportunity to change lanes, a lane
change recommendation is displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 240.
Functional requirements
There is an opportunity to change lanes if, for
example, there is a sufficiently large gap in the
adjacent lane when a preceding vehicle in the
same lane is moving slowly.
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode or Assisted Driving Mode
Plus have been met.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
After the driver checks the adjacent lane, the
turn signal switches on automatically and the
speed is adjusted as necessary. The Auto-
matic Lane Change Assistant then changes
lane into the adjacent lane.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 240.
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode or Assisted Driving
Mode Plus is activated.
Driving on a highway-like road without pe-
destrians or cyclists and with physical barri-
ers to oncoming traffic, e.g., guard rails.
The system does not change lanes if it detects
that the driver has not looked to check or if the
traffic situation changes.
▷
▷
▷
▷
The Driver Attention Camera detects the
driver’s line of sight.
General information
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode
sensors.
This system detects the traffic situation
clearly.
The traffic situation in the adjacent lane
permits a lane change.
Safety information
No lane change was performed immedi-
ately before the current situation.
Warning
▷
▷
Crossable lane boundaries are detected.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
Maximum speed approx.
110 mph/180 km/h.
237
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The minimum speed is country-specific.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version: Route guidance is
activated on the navigation system. The
function is not available when using nav-
igation software via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto.
Icon
Description
Suggestion for a possible lane
change. A signal tone sounds.
A green checkmark on the icon indi-
cates that the function is active.
Turning the Automatic Lane
Change Assistant on/off
Steering wheel icon and lane change
arrow icon are green:
1.
Apps menu
The system performs a lane change
in the arrow direction.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
6. "Assisted Driving"
Additional information:
7. "Active Lane Change": Lane changes can
be done automatically depending on na-
tional-market version.
Assisted View, refer to page 159.
System limits
The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode and
Assisted Driving Mode Plus systems and the
Driver Attention Camera apply.
Changing lanes
1.
The Automatic Lane Change Assis-
tant suggests a lane change. A signal tone
sounds.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
2. Trigger the lane change by checking the
adjacent lane.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to
page 240.
After a short time, the Automatic Lane
Change Assistant initiates a lane change.
▷
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 213.
Cancel the lane change manually, e.g., by
countersteering, in critical situations.
Lane change with active
guidance
If the system cannot perform a lane change,
a corresponding message is displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Principle
After the lane change, the system helps keep
the vehicle in the new lane.
Lane change with active guidance assists the
driver when lane changes are necessary to
reach a destination. A notice is also displayed
on the instrument cluster. A slight jolt can also
be felt on the steering wheel, depending on
national-market version and settings.
Canceling a lane change
The lane change can be canceled by steering
movement into the opposite direction or by op-
erating the turn signal in the opposite direction.
238
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is driven.
General information
The system uses the Assisted Driving Mode
sensors.
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.
Safety information
Switching lane change on/off with
active destination guidance
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and intersection assistant"
7. "Lane Guiding with Navigation"
Switching the steering wheel jerk
on/off
You can switch the steering wheel jerk assis-
tance on/off.
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, and As-
sisted Driving alerts also apply.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 223.
1.
Apps menu
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Functional requirements
▷
Cruise Control and Distance Control are ac-
tivated.
6. "Route and intersection assistant"
7. "Steering wheel impulse"
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.
A situation-dependent minimum speed has
been reached.
Changing lanes
If lane changes are necessary to reach a nav-
igation destination, a corresponding notice is
displayed on the instrument cluster. In addi-
tion, a slight jerk can be felt on the steering
wheel.
▷
▷
▷
The system detects a sufficiently large gap
in traffic in the adjacent lane.
A crossable lane boundary on the side of
the desired lane change is detected.
Destination guidance is active on the navi-
gation system.
To change lanes, follow the instructions on the
instrument cluster.
The function is not available when using
navigation software via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto.
1.
The system detects a suitable gap
in the flow of traffic in the adjacent lane. A
239
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
green checkmark is displayed on the lane
change icon on the instrument cluster. The
system prepares for the lane change.
System limits
The limits of the Cruise Control, Distance Con-
trol, and Assisted Driving Mode systems and
Driver Attention Camera apply.
2. When a suitable gap is detected, the speed
is adapted so that the vehicle remains level
with the opening.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 223.
3. A Check Control message indicates a lane
change suggestion.
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 213.
4. When the traffic situation permits a lane
change, the driver can steer the vehicle into
the next lane.
For vehicles equipped with Lane Change
Assistant: the Lane Change Assistant can
be started, e.g., by operating the turn signal
after the Check Control message appears.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus
Principle
For vehicles equipped with Automatic Lane
Change Assistant: Once the Check Control
message appears, a lane change can be
started by checking the adjacent lane.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus provides assis-
tance with guiding the vehicle on select high-
ways.
The system increases driving comfort in suita-
ble driving situations.
5. If necessary, the system automatically
starts additional lane changes.
Sensors in the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Display in the instrument cluster
Different versions of this function are available
depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version.
Icon
Function
Indicates a necessary lane change.
The icon varies depending on the
traffic situation.
▷
Version for speeds up to approx.
40 mph/60 km/h, e.g., traffic jam.
▷
Version for speeds up to approx.
85 mph/135 km/h.
A green checkmark on the icon indi-
cates that the function is active.
A red cross on the icon indicates that
the system cannot assist with the
lane change.
General information
For versions up to 85 mph/135 km/h, the fol-
lowing applies:
Assisted Driving Mode Plus will be active at the
time of vehicle delivery and will only be avail-
able for a limited period. Information about
the duration of availability for Assisted Driving
Mode Plus will be available prior to and at
the time of vehicle sale. Assisted Driving Mode
Plus may be terminated earlier due to techni-
cal or legal requirements. Further information
about the availability of Assisted Driving Mode
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the traffic situation is displayed
in Assisted View on the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 159.
240
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Plus can be requested from an authorized
service center.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Side radar sensors, front.
Side radar sensors, rear.
Safety information
The sensors in the steering wheel.
Driver Attention Camera.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
The version up to 85 mph/135 km/h addition-
ally uses the following sensors:
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Exterior mirror cameras.
Rearview camera.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements apply to
Assisted Driving Mode Plus:
Warning
▷
Assisted Driving Mode Plus must be avail-
able in the country in which the vehicle is
driven.
This system is only intended for use on
roads with structural separation from oncom-
ing traffic, e.g., highways. Because of the
system limits, the system can also remain ac-
tive on roads without structural separations
and may not react as expected. There is
a risk of accident, injury, and property dam-
age. Deactivate the system if it is enabled on
roads without structural separations.
▷
The functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode have been met.
Assisted Driving Mode is active and the
LED displays on the steering wheel are
switched on.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and
the use of this function may be prohibited or
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and
local laws.
▷
Driving on a highway-like road without pe-
destrians or cyclists and with physical barri-
ers to oncoming traffic, e.g., guard rails.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Lane boundaries are detected.
Sufficient lane width.
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also apply.
Additional information:
Sufficiently wide curve radius.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
The navigation system must clearly identify
the road and vehicle position.
Overview
▷
This function must be available on the road
on which the vehicle is driving.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
241
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Antennas located in the roof must not be
covered, e.g., by roof loads or snow.
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the
steering wheel.
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.
The system begins to assist the driver with
vehicle control.
When the system is switched on, the following
functions are enabled:
For the version up to 40 mph/60 km/h, the fol-
lowing additional functional requirements ap-
ply:
▷
▷
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation.
Side collision mitigation.
▷
▷
A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.
Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.
For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h:
Some speed control systems, e.g., adjust-
ing speed to course of road.
For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h, the
following additional functional requirements
apply:
Displays in the instrument cluster
▷
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is enabled in
the vehicle.
Icon
Description
▷
▷
The navigation data must be up to date.
Indicator light green: system is active.
Vehicle speed is less than approx.
85 mph/135 km/h.
Indicator light is white: System can be
used.
▷
The systems in the vehicle, e.g., the At-
tention Assistant and the Driver Attention
Camera recognize that the driver is rested.
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Switching Assisted Driving Mode
Plus on/off
1.
Apps menu
Additional information:
2. "Vehicle"
Assisted View, refer to page 159.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Displays on the steering wheel
6. "Assisted Driving"
7. "Assisted Driving Plus"
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is automatically
offered when Assisted Driving Mode is active
and all functional requirements for Assisted
Driving Mode Plus have been met.
To activate this function, remove your hands
from the steering wheel. Remain ready to steer
and brake at all times.
The two LEDs above the keypads illuminate
depending on the situation.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is shown in green.
242
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Green: the system is active.
Speed Limit Assistant
Yellow: system will be interrupted.
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.
Red: system will be deactivated.
Principle
▷
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-
plied.
Grab the steering wheel immediately with
your hands.
Additional information:
General information
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,
this new speed value can be applied for the
following systems:
Displays in the Head-up display
Depending on the equipment, the system in-
formation can also be displayed in the Head-
up display.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control.
Distance control.
Assisted Driving Mode.
Assisted Driving Mode Plus.
Navigation system displays
For the version up to 85 mph/135 km/h, roads
on which Assisted Driving Mode Plus supports
vehicle control can be displayed on the naviga-
tion system.
The speed value is suggested as the new de-
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
value, the corresponding system must be acti-
vated.
1.
Navigation menu
Depending on the equipment, destination sys-
tem and national-market version, the value
can be applied automatically.
2. "Suggestions"
3. "Availability"
System limits
The system limits of the following systems ap-
ply:
Safety information
Warning
▷
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode.
Driver Attention Camera.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
For version up to 85 mph/135 km/h: Fati-
gue Alert
▷
Sensors of the vehicle.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 213.
Fatigue alert, refer to page 212.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
243
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Warning
▷
▷
"Show current limit": current speed lim-
its are displayed without being applied
in the instrument cluster.
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust the
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate
"Off": depending on the national-market
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed
Limit Assistant will be turned off.
If necessary, other anticipatory comfort
functions will be turned off.
Additional information:
Speed Limit Info, refer to page 219.
Overview
Displays in the instrument cluster
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter when the system and a speed control sys-
tem are activated.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Accept suggested speed manually.
Icon
Function
Detected change of a speed limit with
immediate effect.
Set speed, refer to page 221.
Depending on the national-market
version, it is possible to switch be-
tween the units of measurement.
Turning Speed Limit Assistant
on/off
Indicator light illuminates green: the
detected speed limit can be applied
with the SET button.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
After it has been applied, a green
checkmark is displayed.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Automatic adoption
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. "Speed limits"
"Adjust automatically": Distance Control auto-
matically adopts any detected speed limits
when driving on roads with barriers separating
traffic in opposing directions.
8. Select the desired setting:
▷
"Adjust automatically": depending on
the equipment, detected speed limits
are applied automatically.
After an automatic adoption, the button
can be pressed to switch back to the
last set value of the desired speed.
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits
can be applied manually.
Manual adoption
A detected speed limit can be applied man-
ually to the active speed control system.
244
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
When the SET icon is displayed, press
the button.
Cruise Control without Distance Control: for
system related reasons, the speed limits can-
not be applied automatically.
Additional information:
Speed adjustment
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Info, refer to
page 220.
Principle
▷
System limits of the sensors, refer to
page 36.
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is
applied exactly or with a tolerance.
General information
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up
to 40 mph/60 km/h can be set up.
Adapting the speed to the
route
Principle
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or
deactivated.
The system can be configured so that with
active distance control, the vehicle adapts the
speed automatically to the route.
Setting the speed adjustment
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the
following situations as necessary:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
▷
▷
▷
▷
Before making turns.
Before a roundabout.
Before a curve.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
In front of an exit ramp on highways or
highway-like roads.
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. Select the desired setting:
Safety information
▷
"Adjust speed limits": set the tolerance
for speed adjustments, which applies to
all speed limits.
Warning
▷
▷
"2nd adjustment up to": activate or de-
activate additional speed adaptation.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
"Adjust speed limits": with activated
additional speed adjustment, set the
tolerance for speed limits up to
40 mph/60 km/h.
System limits
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed
Limit Info system.
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, Assisted
Driving Mode, and Speed Limit Assist alerts
also apply.
245
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Additional information:
7. "Cornering speed"
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 223.
8. Select the desired setting.
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 243.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, information for the system is
displayed in the Assisted View in the central
display area of the instrument cluster.
Functional requirements
▷
Cruise Control and distance control are acti-
vated.
Additional information:
Assisted View, refer to page 159.
▷
▷
Driving on a highway or highway-like road.
With navigation system: guidance is acti-
vated.
System limits
Depending on the national-market version or
country in which the vehicle is currently being
driven, the function may not be available.
The use of navigation software via Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto may lead to func-
tional limitations, for instance deviations
with navigation instructions.
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-
ited extent to the route ahead in the following
situations:
▷
The function must be available in the coun-
try in which the vehicle is driven.
▷
If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-
termined by the navigation system.
Adapting speed automatically to
route
1.
▷
On wintry roads.
Additionally, the limits for Cruise Control, Dis-
tance Control, Assisted Driving, and Speed
Limit Assist systems apply.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
Additional information:
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cruise control, refer to page 223.
Distance Control, refer to page 225.
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 232.
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 243.
6. "Route and intersection assistant"
7. "Automatically adjust speed to route"
Adjusting the cornering speed
The cornering speed can be adjusted depend-
ing on national-market version.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Route and intersection assistant"
246
Parking
CONTROLS
Parking
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 263.
Vehicle features and options
▷
▷
▷
Maneuver Assistant, refer to page 268.
Remote Control Parking, refer to page 272.
Back-up Assistant, refer to page 273.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Safety information
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Parking assistance systems
General information
The parking assistance systems include differ-
ent individual systems. The individual systems
help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or
reversing by providing various assistance func-
tions, sensors, and camera views.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Rearview camera, refer to page 252.
Semi-automatic camera perspective, refer
to page 253.
Overview
▷
Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 253.
Button in the vehicle
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Side view, refer to page 254.
3D view, refer to page 254.
Car wash view, refer to page 255.
Panorama View, refer to page 255.
Automatic activation of panorama view, re-
fer to page 256.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Door opening angle, refer to page 257.
Remote 3D View, refer to page 257.
Park Distance Control, refer to page 258.
Park assistance button
Active Park Distance Control, refer to
page 261.
Sensors
▷
Drive-off monitoring, refer to page 262.
The parking assistance systems are controlled
by the following sensors:
247
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
General information
Depending on the equipment, one or more
cameras capture the area from different se-
lectable perspectives.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Front camera.
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-
ings or a part of it is depicted.
Top view cameras.
Rearview camera.
Depending on the national-market version, ei-
ther the automatic or the semi-automatic cam-
era perspective is displayed.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Operating concept
Turning display on/off
The camera-based individual systems are op-
erated with the function bars on the control
display. The camera views can be viewed by
selecting the appropriate icon.
General information
The parking assistance systems view switches
off automatically when driving forwards or if a
certain distance or speed is exceeded.
In the Parking menu, some parking assistance
systems can be configured individually.
With reverse gear
Some parking assistance systems can be
started by voice control as needed, e.g., driving
in/out of a parking space with the Automatic
Parking Assistant.
When drive-ready state is switched on, the dis-
play is automatically switched on if selector
lever position R is engaged.
Additional information:
With the Park Assist key
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 55.
Press the button.
Calling up Park menu
1.
Apps menu
Via iDrive
2. "Vehicle"
1.
Apps menu
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Parking"
Display in the instrument cluster
The instrument cluster shows displays of some
parking assistance systems such as Park Dis-
tance Control or Automatic Parking Assistant.
6. Select the desired settings.
Display
Principle
With the Park Distance Control display and
various camera views, the parking assistance
systems help you park, maneuver, and reverse
your vehicle.
248
Parking
CONTROLS
Parking view
1
Status of parking assistance systems
Assisted View
2
3
1
Toolbar, left
Selection menu
2
3
4
5
6
7
Camera image
Selection window
Display on the control display
Automatic camera perspective
Semi-automatic camera perspective
Side view
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment and on the
activated parking assistance system, the con-
trol display will vary.
Toolbar, right
Toolbar, left
Assistance view
Different views and settings can be selected
via the left toolbar depending on the equip-
ment:
▷
"Parking view"
Depending on vehicle equipment, camera
views or the Park Distance Control view are
displayed.
▷
"Assist view"
A stylized top view of the vehicle is dis-
played.
1
Toolbar, left
▷
▷
"Panorama view"
The cross traffic view is displayed.
"More"
2
3
4
Camera image
Vehicle top view
Toolbar, right
▷
▷
▷
"3D view"
A three-dimensional view of the vehicle
is displayed.
"Car wash view"
Your own lane can be displayed to make
it easier to drive into a car wash.
"Camera cleaning"
249
Parking
CONTROLS
Cleaning of the front camera and rear-
view camera can be switched on as
needed.
Icon
Meaning
No search for parking assistance
system offers.
▷
"Settings"
No other parking assistance sys-
tems available.
Settings can be entered in the Park
menu.
Parking assistance systems have
failed.
Toolbar, right
The Parking Assistant functions are displayed
in the right toolbar.
Search for parking assistance sys-
tem offers is active.
▷
▷
Status of the parking assistance systems.
White: an available maneuver is se-
lected but is not being performed.
Functional requirements have not
been met or the functions transfer
has been completed.
Available parking methods of the Automatic
Parking Assistant.
▷
▷
▷
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.
Functions of the Maneuver Assistant.
Green: parking assistance system is
active. Functions are controlled de-
pending on the system activated.
Additional information in case of malfunc-
tions.
Maneuver Assistant records the
maneuver to be stored.
Status of parking assistance
systems
The status of parking assistance systems is
indicated by icons on the toolbar on the right of
the control display, in the status area on the in-
strument cluster, and on the Head-up display,
depending on vehicle equipment. In addition
to this icon, text also appears on the control
display.
Additional displays
General information
Additional displays can be shown in the cam-
era image of the display of the parking assis-
tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make
parking and maneuvering easier.
The following parking assistance systems are
displayed:
Several additional displays can be active at the
same time.
▷
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant.
Maneuver Assistant.
Turning additional displays on/off
Back-up Assistant.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
6. Select the desired setting.
250
Parking
CONTROLS
Using parking aid lines
Parking aid lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
Pathway lines
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre-
sponding turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind
the vehicle depending on the gear engaged.
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted
to the steering movements depending on the
steering-wheel angle.
Obstacles are detected by the sensors.
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance
Control are shown by marks in the camera im-
age.
Turning circle lines
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited ex-
tent in the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
With a door open.
With open cargo area.
With exterior mirrors folded in.
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the
camera image identify areas that are currently
not shown such as an open door.
The lines show the course of the smallest pos-
sible turning circle on a level road.
Only one turning circle line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-
gle.
251
Parking
CONTROLS
System limits
Rearview camera
Safety information
Principle
The rearview camera helps when reverse
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the
vehicle is shown on the control display.
Warning
Because of system limitations, this system
may either not respond, or respond too late,
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk
of accident, injury, and property damage. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-
tations.
Additional views can be shown on the display,
e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Functional requirements
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
The cargo area is fully closed.
▷
The camera area is clean and clear.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 36.
Turning the rearview camera on/off
Field of view
Turning the camera view on
automatically
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
rearview camera is automatically switched on
if selector lever position R is engaged.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Turning the camera view off
automatically
The rearview camera turns off automatically
when driving forward or when a certain dis-
tance or speed is exceeded.
Objects shown on the control display may be
closer than they appear. Do not estimate the
distance to the objects on the control display.
The camera's detection range can be limited
by protruding cargo or a rear carrier.
Turning the camera view on/off
manually
Malfunction
A camera failure is displayed on the control
display.
1.
Press the button.
The malfunctioning camera's detection range
is shown by the shaded area on the control
display.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Depending on vehicle equipment: The
icon in the selection window is selected au-
tomatically.
252
Parking
CONTROLS
To exit rearview camera view, select an-
other camera view in the selection window
or press the button again.
General information
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front
of or behind the bumper, or switches to side
Park Distance Control as necessary.
Deactivated rearview camera
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for
instance when the cargo area is open, the
camera image is displayed with gray shading.
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and
the system uses a semi-automatic camera
perspective to the rear. If necessary, select the
automatic camera perspective when reverse
gear is engaged. The automatic camera per-
spective will then be maintained for the current
parking operation.
Semi-automatic camera
perspective
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Principle
Depending on the parking direction and en-
gaged selector lever position, a fixed camera
perspective is displayed with the areas in front
of or behind the vehicle.
Turning the automatic camera
perspective on/off
Turning the camera view on/off
automatically
When the parking assistance systems' display
is turned on, automatic camera perspective is
selected automatically.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning the semi-automatic camera
perspective on/off
The icon in the selection window is selected
automatically.
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,
select another camera view in the selection
window.
1.
Press the button.
2.
Select the icon in the selection window.
To exit the fixed camera view, select an-
other camera view in the selection window.
Turning the camera view on/off
manually
Automatic camera
perspective
1.
Press the button.
2.
The icon in the selection window is se-
lected automatically.
Principle
To exit the steering-dependent camera
view, select another camera view in the se-
lection window or press the button again.
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-
ing direction.
This perspective adapts to the respective driv-
ing situation.
253
Parking
CONTROLS
The side view looks from rear to front and, in
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-
sible obstacles.
Side protection
Principle
The side Park Distance Control is automati-
cally displayed when the automatic camera
perspective is turned on. The function shows
obstacles located next to the vehicle.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning the side view on/off
Display
The selection window lets you choose the side
view for the left or right side of the vehicle.
1.
Press the button.
2.
Select the icon for the desired vehicle
side in the selection window.
To exit the side view, select another cam-
era view in the selection window.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
3D view
▷
▷
No markings: no obstacles detected.
Principle
Color marks: warning against detected ob-
stacles.
With 3D view, a circle is displayed around the
vehicle top view in the selection window.
Specified perspectives can be selected on the
circle.
System limits
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
General information
The current perspective is marked with a cam-
era icon.
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the
display after a certain time. The area next to
the vehicle must be newly captured.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning the 3D view on/off
Side view
1.
Press the button.
"More"
2.
3.
Principle
"3D view"
Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.
To exit the 3D view, select another camera
view on the left toolbar.
254
Parking
CONTROLS
Car wash view
Panorama View
Principle
Principle
The car wash view assists when entering a car
wash.
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and
intersections.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. To pro-
vide greater visibility, the front camera and, de-
pending on vehicle equipment, rearview cam-
era cover the side of the vehicle.
Turning the car wash view on/off
1.
Press the button.
"More"
2.
3.
Depending on vehicle equipment, this func-
tion can turn on automatically when activation
points are saved.
"Car wash view"
To exit the car wash view, select a different
camera view in the left toolbar.
The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-
ble for distance estimations.
Display
Depending on vehicle equipment, the function
can be used when driving forward or in re-
verse.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving
into a car wash.
▷
▷
Rearview camera.
Depending on the equipment: front camera.
This view can be used to position the vehicle
correctly within the washing system guide rails.
Turning the panoramic view on/off
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely forward.
1.
Press the button.
"Panorama view"
Additional information:
2.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 131.
To exit panorama view, select another
camera view on the left toolbar.
255
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The reversing camera and front camera
must be installed.
Display
The direction of travel, selector lever posi-
tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to
a stored activation point.
Storing activation points
1. Drive your vehicle to the location where you
want the system to turn on, then stop.
Yellow lines on the screen display identify the
bumpers of your own vehicle.
2.
3.
Press the button.
"Panorama view"
When reverse gear is engaged, the reversing
camera view is displayed. Depending on ve-
hicle equipment, the front camera view is dis-
played when forward gear is engaged.
4. "Activation point"
The current position is displayed.
5. "Save activation point"
Activation points are saved with the following
information, for example:
Automatic activation of
panorama view
▷
▷
▷
With the city/town.
With the city/town and the street.
With the GPS coordinates.
Principle
You can rename the location and street infor-
mation created automatically.
Positions at which panorama view should
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-
vation points.
Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched
on and off.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
1.
Apps menu
The activation points can be used when driv-
ing forward and, depending on national-mar-
ket version, when reversing.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance
systems chapter.
6. "GPS-based"
Functional requirements
▷
A GPS signal must be received.
▷
Depending on national-market version: A
BMW ID or driver profile must be activated.
256
Parking
CONTROLS
Editing activation points
You can rename or delete specific activation
points or all of them.
System limits
The system does not provide a warning of ap-
proaching road users.
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the
display for technical reasons.
1.
Press the button.
"Panorama view"
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the
control display does not overlap with any other
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to
other objects.
2.
3. "Manage points"
A list of all saved activation points is dis-
played.
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
control display.
4. Select the desired setting.
Door opening angle
Remote 3D View
Principle
Principle
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door
opening angle display is shown automatically
when stationary.
The My BMW App and camera views in park-
ing view such as automatic camera perspec-
tive enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-
roundings on a mobile device.
This display helps estimate how far the doors
can be opened when parking.
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-
tion.
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the
opening angles of the doors.
General information
For reasons of data protection, the function
can only be used three times within two hours.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Display
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Top view cameras.
Rearview camera.
Functional requirements
▷
Data transfer must be activated.
The maximum opening angle of the doors is
displayed in selector lever position P.
257
Parking
CONTROLS
Data protection, refer to page 69.
Park Distance Control
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be installed on the
mobile end device.
Principle
ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with
an existing ConnectedDrive account must
be activated.
Park Distance Control assists with parking.
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles
in front of or behind the vehicle.
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 70.
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-
sonic sensors can also be reported.
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D
View
The function can be activated or deactivated
individually or together with other functions.
General information
The range of the system, depending on obsta-
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
1.
Apps menu
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is issued as early as a distance to the
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
5. Select the desired setting.
After activation, Remote 3D View can be
accessed using the My BMW App.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
System limits
The system may not be fully operational or
may not be available in the following situa-
tions:
Safety information
Warning
▷
With a door or the cargo area open. Dark
fields in the display indicate areas that are
not recorded by the system.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
▷
With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.
When other camera functions are being
performed in the vehicle.
▷
▷
The vehicle moves faster than walking
speed.
In case of missing or weak Internet connec-
tion.
Warning
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de-
layed due to physical circumstances. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
258
Parking
CONTROLS
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.
Off: the LED goes out.
If the system is manually switched on when
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview
camera image is displayed.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Depending on the national-market version, the
system cannot be turned off manually when
the reverse gear is engaged.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
Acoustic warning
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
General information
Turning Park Distance Control
on/off
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a
sound is heard from the rear left speaker.
Turning on the system automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.
▷
When drive-ready state is switched on
when selector lever position R is engaged.
When the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
▷
While approaching detected obstacles
if the speed is lower than approx.
When there are objects in front of and behind
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating
continuous tone will sound between the front
and rear speakers.
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance
depends on the situation in question.
The automatic activation of detected obstacles
can be activated or deactivated.
1.
Apps menu
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone
are turned off when selector lever position P is
engaged.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
Depending on national-market version, the in-
termittent tones are switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary.
6. "Automatic PDC activation"
If an object approaches when the vehicle is
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.
Turning off the system automatically
Adjusting the volume
The volume of the acoustic warning can be
adjusted.
When driving forward, the system turns off au-
tomatically as needed when a certain distance
or speed is exceeded.
1.
Apps menu
Turning the system on/off manually
2. "Vehicle"
Press the button.
3. "Driving settings"
259
Parking
CONTROLS
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
Display
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-
hind the vehicle.
6. "PDC signal volume"
7. Set the desired value.
Depending on national-market
version: Turn off acoustic warning
Depending on national-market version, the
acoustic warning can be turned off while per-
forming a parking maneuver.
Press
the icon in the status field at the top
of the control display.
When the Park Distance Control is switched
on again, the acoustic warning is automatically
switched on again.
Example display of warnings behind the vehi-
cle.
Visual warning
General information
The approach to an object is displayed on the
control display and in the instrument cluster as
soon as the system is activated.
Objects that are farther away are already dis-
played before a signal sounds.
Example display of warnings next to the vehi-
cle.
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown
for a better estimation of the space required.
▷
▷
▷
Gray shaded area: Sensor detection range.
No obstacles were detected within detec-
tion range.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor
detection range is shown by the shaded, ring-
shaped area. Green, yellow, and red markings
indicate when obstacles are detected within
the detection range.
Colored marks in shaded area: Obstacles
have been detected within the detection
range.
If vehicle is equipped with Cross Traffic Warn-
ing: A warning is also shown on the display for
vehicles approaching from the side at the rear
and front.
Shaded area interrupted: the area next to
the vehicle has not yet been detected.
System limits
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
General information
The function for protecting the vehicle sides
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-
viously detected by the sensors when passing
by.
260
Parking
CONTROLS
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-
ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are
hidden after a certain time. The area on the
side of the vehicle must be newly captured.
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not
performed.
After emergency braking to a stop, further
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly
press the accelerator pedal and release as
needed.
Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
Unwarranted warnings
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-
ranted warnings.
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-
ble at any time.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.
Safety information
Malfunction
An icon is displayed on the control dis-
play.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Depending on vehicle equipment: The
sensor detection range may not be shown on
the control display.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Active Park Distance Control
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Principle
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute
risk of collision.
Rearview camera.
General information
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-
vented under all circumstances.
The function is available below walking speed
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
261
Parking
CONTROLS
Deactivating Active Park Distance
Control temporarily
Drive-off monitoring
After emergency braking, the function can be
temporarily deactivated on the control display.
A corresponding message is displayed.
Principle
In case of a risk of collision, the start-up mon-
itoring reduces the drive power when driving
off.
1. "Configure"
2. "Deactivate temporarily"
General information
During continued driving in this surrounding
situation, no further emergency braking will
occur.
When obstacles are detected in close range in
front of the vehicle, the acceleration will be re-
duced. If necessary, this permits timely manual
braking.
The function is automatically reactivated when
Park Distance Control is switched on again.
When obstacles are detected behind the vehi-
cle, the system will brake.
Settings
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle
will be protected by the system.
1.
Apps menu
Safety information
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"
7. Select the desired setting.
Display
As soon as the system engages, an
icon is displayed with a corresponding
message.
System limits
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
262
Parking
CONTROLS
Functional requirements
System limits
▷
▷
▷
▷
Selector lever position D or R is engaged
when the vehicle is stationary.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Obstacles in the immediate vicinity are de-
tected in front of or behind the vehicle.
The accelerator pedal is heavily applied,
nearly to the end point.
Automatic Parking Assistant
The accelerator pedal is immediately ap-
plied after engaging the selector lever posi-
tion and obstacle detection.
Principle
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support
when parallel parking and parking transverse
to the road.
Turning drive-off monitoring on/off
1.
Apps menu
In addition, the system makes it easier to
park out of parallel and perpendicular parking
spaces.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The
system status is displayed.
6. "Drive off monitoring"
7. "Drive off monitoring"
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
The system calculates the best possible park-
ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,
and takes control of the vehicle while parking.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically turned on again at the
next drive.
The operating principle and operation of the
system is divided into the following steps:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.
Turning on.
Canceling reduced drive power
The reduction of the drive power is canceled in
the following situations:
Parking.
Driving out of parking spaces.
▷
▷
The accelerator pedal is released.
The parking manoeuver while parking is per-
formed automatically.
After the accelerator pedal has been de-
pressed completely twice.
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it
reaches a position where it can be driven out
of the parking space without further steering
movements.
▷
A specific distance has been traveled.
If the reduction in drive power is canceled by
covering a certain distance, the drive power is
released gradually.
When driving out of perpendicular parking
spaces, the vehicle is maneuvered out of the
parking space to enable continued driving in
the desired direction.
Display
As soon as the system engages, an
icon is displayed with a corresponding
message.
263
Parking
CONTROLS
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional
increases the comfort and range of uses of
the Automatic Parking Assistant. In addition to
the parking methods of the Automatic Parking
Assistant, parking in parking spaces that are
marked with lines is possible.
Warning
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic
closely and actively intervene where appro-
priate
With Park Assist Professional, the parking ma-
neuver can also be performed using Remote
Control Parking on a smartphone.
Parking methods
Park Assist supports the following functions:
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the
road.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Safety information
Warning
Perpendicular parking: reverse or forward
parking perpendicular to the road.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
264
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Top view cameras.
Rearview camera.
Functional requirements
Measurement of parking spaces
▷
Maximum speed while driving forward ap-
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
Driving out of parallel parking spaces.
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
Longitudinal parking:
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
Minimum length of gap between two ob-
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
Driving out of perpendicular parking spaces.
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Perpendicular parking:
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces
must be estimated by the driver. Due to
technical limitations, the system is only able
to approximate the depth of perpendicular
parking spaces.
Park Assist Professional: Parking in parking
spaces with parking lines.
Parking lines for Park Assist Professional:
Sensors
▷
The parking space must be clearly marked
with lines.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled
by the following sensors:
▷
The one-time calibration of the camera af-
ter vehicle delivery must be complete. Drive
a few kilometers in daylight to do so.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professional
is additionally controlled by the following cam-
eras:
Parking operation
▷
Doors and cargo area are closed.
▷
Driver's seat belt is fastened.
265
Parking
CONTROLS
Leaving parking spaces
Turning parking operation display
on/off
When the Automatic Parking Assistant is ac-
tive, the parking operation is displayed in the
camera image on the control display.
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-
matic Parking Assistant, and an object has
been detected in the area around the vehi-
cle.
▷
The vehicle was manually parked in re-
verse, and objects have been detected in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The
distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in-
ches/15 cm.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
▷
The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m
longer than the vehicle.
6. "Show assistance info"
Displays
Turning the signal tone on/off
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces
can be turned on and off.
General information
The current status of parking assistance sys-
tems is shown on the right-hand toolbar, on
the instrument cluster, and on the Head-up
display, depending on vehicle equipment.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
Different icons are shown on the control dis-
play for selecting the parking method.
The sequence of the displayed icons corre-
sponds to the prioritized parking option.
6. "Sound when available"
The direction of the arrow changes for the
icons for parking methods for driving out of a
parking space.
Parking using the Automatic
Parking Assistant
1. For the parking space search when driving
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of
max. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Icon
Meaning
Reverse lengthwise parking, right.
Reverse lengthwise parking, left.
Reverse perpendicular parking.
Forward perpendicular parking.
The parking space search is activated
and displayed on the instrument cluster.
2. Press the
gear.
button or engage reverse
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the control display and in the instrument
cluster.
266
Parking
CONTROLS
3. On the control display: Select one of the
parking maneuvers offered. You can switch
to another parking maneuver as necessary.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
A message will be displayed at the end of
the maneuver.
In the instrument cluster: select suggested
parking method with the knurled wheel on
the steering wheel.
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
driving out of parking space and driving off
as usual.
Green: the system takes control of the
parking operation.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned
off automatically.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant manually
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-
celed manually at any time, e.g.:
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
Depending on national-market version, an
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for
Park Distance Control.
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice
in succession.
At the end of the parking operation, selec-
tor lever position P is set.
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and
move the steering wheel slightly at the
same time.
The end of the parking operation is indi-
cated on the control display and in the in-
strument cluster.
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the
selector lever at the same time.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is canceled
without engaging selector lever position P.
Driving can continue immediately.
Driving out of a parking space using
the Automatic Parking Assistant
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
2.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button or engage reverse gear.
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or
the selector lever.
3. On the control display: select the desired
parking method.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When setting the parking brake.
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.
With open cargo area.
In the instrument cluster: select suggested
parking method with the knurled wheel on
the steering wheel.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
With open hood.
With the doors open.
Green: the system takes control of ma-
neuvering.
During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
267
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
When changing over to another function on
the control display.
the ground. The system orients itself ac-
cording to objects.
When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
▷
For special parking spaces, e.g., metered
parking spaces with automatic locking
mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-
tems.
▷
▷
▷
On snow-covered or slippery road.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome such as curbs.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
▷
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-
pear.
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
With insufficient distances, which are indi-
cated by Park Distance Control.
▷
▷
▷
On slippery ground.
When a maximum number of parking at-
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-
ceeded.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
When the system is automatically aborted, se-
lector lever position P is engaged.
▷
▷
▷
In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may
be detected or suitable parking spaces may
not be detected at all.
Continuing the parking operation
If parking or leaving a parking space has been
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if
needed.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Turn the Automatic Parking Assistant on again
and follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
The Automatic Parking Assistant may not be
operational. Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Maneuver Assistant
Principle
No parking assistance
The Maneuver Assistant provides support for
recurring parking and maneuvering situations.
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-
fer assistance in the following situations:
Parking and maneuvering operations can be
recorded and then carried out automatically by
the system.
▷
▷
▷
In tight curves.
For diagonal parking spaces.
Automatic Parking Assistant: for parking
spaces that are only marked with lines on
268
Parking
CONTROLS
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
Warning
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic
closely and actively intervene where appro-
priate
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Detection range
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
A recurring maneuver is driven manually and
thereby recorded.
When the vehicle reaches the activation area
for the distance covered by the stored maneu-
ver, the maneuver can be activated on the con-
trol display or in the instrument cluster.
The detection range for a maneuver is divided
into the following areas:
After the activation, the system takes control
of the vehicle and carries out the maneuver
automatically.
▷
Proximity range, arrow 1: the system will
begin with the localization in the back-
ground within a range of approx. 26 ft/8 m
around the distance covered of a stored
maneuver.
In addition, the parking maneuver can be per-
formed using Remote Control Parking on a
smartphone.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
▷
▷
Close range, arrow 2: in a range of ap-
prox. 6 ft/2 m around the distance covered,
a stored maneuver can be displayed on the
control display.
Safety information
Activation range, arrow 3: the stored
maneuver on the control display can be ac-
tivated within a range of approx. 3.5 ft/1 m.
After the activation, the system takes con-
trol of the vehicle and carries out the ma-
neuver automatically.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors and cameras:
269
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
4. Drive the vehicle to the desired end posi-
tion.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Front camera.
The maneuver is recorded.
When recording a route, do not drive faster
than 9 mph/15 km/h.
Top view cameras.
Rearview camera.
While recording, the distance covered will
be displayed.
When the maximum distance covered or
the maximum speed is reached, a message
will be displayed and a signal tone will
sound.
Functional requirement
To use the Maneuver Assistant, the one-off
calibration process of the camera after vehicle
delivery must be complete. Drive a few kilome-
ters in daylight to do so.
5. Vehicle stationary: "Save recording".
6. To assign a name to the recorded maneu-
ver, tap the name.
Recording maneuver
7. Enter a name and confirm.
8. Save your selection.
General information
Up to ten maneuvers can be recorded at differ-
ent locations.
Do not move the vehicle until the recording
has been stored.
Up to four overlapping maneuvers can be re-
corded.
Performing stored maneuver
Identical maneuvers under different ambient
conditions can be recorded such as light condi-
tions.
1. Drive the vehicle into the activation range
and stop. The control display and instru-
ment cluster indicate that a stored maneu-
ver can be activated.
For each maneuver, a maximum distance cov-
ered of 656 ft/200 m is possible.
2.
: activate stored maneuver.
In total, a distance covered of approx.
1,969 ft/600 m distributed to the ten possible
maneuvers can be recorded.
Green: after activation, the system takes
control of the vehicle and performs the ma-
neuver automatically. If applicable, follow
the instructions on the control display or in
the instrument cluster.
Maneuvers with a distance covered of less
than 20 ft/6 m cannot be recorded.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
Recording maneuver
1. Drive the vehicle to the starting point from
which a maneuver must be recorded and
stop.
At the end of the parking operation, selec-
tor lever position P is set.
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant
manually
The vehicle can be controlled manually during
an active maneuver by taking the following ac-
tions:
2.
3.
Press the button.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
"Record new path"
270
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal twice
in succession.
and follow the instructions on the control dis-
play or in the instrument cluster.
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and
move the steering wheel slightly at the
same time.
Editing stored maneuvers
Individual or all maneuvers can be deleted or
renamed.
▷
Depress the brake pedal and operate the
selector lever at the same time.
1.
Apps menu
The Maneuver Assistant is canceled without
engaging selector lever position P. Driving can
continue immediately.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking"
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant
automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
6. "Recorded paths"
7. Select the maneuver to be edited.
8. Select the desired action.
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
System limits
▷
When operating the accelerator pedal or
the selector lever.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
With open cargo area.
With open hood.
Functional limitations
System limits can cause functional limitations
such as in the following situations:
With the doors open.
During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
▷
▷
▷
With poor GPS reception.
▷
▷
▷
When the system limits of the ultrasonic
sensors and cameras are reached.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
In case of recorded maneuvers where the
system minimum distance to objects can-
not be maintained.
When changing over to another function on
the control display.
When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
▷
Greatly deviating conditions when storing
and driving the distance covered, for in-
stance other tires or changed ambient con-
ditions like light conditions or weather.
▷
▷
▷
▷
In case of obstacles.
On snow-covered or slippery road.
When the lane is too narrow.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷
▷
Delayed display of overlapping stored ma-
neuvers when driving into the activation
area.
In the event of an automatic cancellation of
the system, the vehicle is decelerated to a
complete stop and selector lever position P is
engaged.
In multi-story parking garages, for record-
ings at different parking levels, or for re-
cordings that run over several parking lev-
els.
An interrupted maneuver can be continued, if
needed. Turn the Maneuver Assistant on again
271
Parking
CONTROLS
If the calibration process for the cam-
era is not completed after vehicle deliv-
ery, an icon appears on the display of
the parking assistance systems when reverse
gear is engaged.
General information
Note the information in the Automatic Parking
Assistant and Maneuver Assistant chapter.
Protect the smartphone against unauthorized
use.
Tap the icon and follow the instructions on the
control display.
The low-beam headlights are switched on for
the duration of the maneuver.
A parking maneuver offered by Park Assist
Professional is only available for Remote Con-
trol Parking for a short time after exiting the
vehicle.
Remote Control Parking
Principle
With Remote Control Parking, the vehicle can
be driven remotely when parking and maneu-
vering using the Maneuver Assistant and Park
Assist Professional.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
All occupants have left the vehicle.
Doors and cargo area are closed.
Make sure that no one is located within
range of the maneuver.
The maneuver is performed independently,
without you having to be inside the vehicle, us-
ing a smartphone and the My BMW App. This
makes it easy to get in and out of the vehicle.
▷
Make sure that no one is located in the nar-
row spaces between the vehicle and sta-
tionary objects, e.g., between the vehicle
and a garage wall.
When parking in a suitable spot, e.g., a garage,
the vehicle's parking position can be corrected
by maneuvering manually with the My BMW
App.
▷
To manually correct the vehicle position on
the My BMW App, the minimum width of
the parking space must be the vehicle width
plus 1.9 ft/0.6 m.
A maneuver that has already been started can
be continued at any time with Remote Control
Parking.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with Re-
mote Control Parking.
The My BMW App must be installed on a
compatible smartphone.
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
The My BMW App must be linked to a Con-
nectedDrive account.
Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart-
phone.
The distance between vehicle and smart-
phone is no greater than approx. 19 ft/6 m.
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
A valid digital key must be set up for the
vehicle, then recognized without issue.
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 88.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
272
Parking
CONTROLS
tional equipment, the national-market version
or the option for later enabling and software
updates. This also applies to individual func-
tions of the system.
Parking with Remote Control
Parking
1. Engage selector lever position P.
2. Leave the vehicle and close the doors and
cargo area.
For information on whether a function is cur-
rently available in the vehicle or when the func-
tion can be installed in the vehicle, contact an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
3. Open Remote Control Parking in the My
BMW app and maneuver forward or back-
ward, or select the desired parking method.
4. Follow the instructions on the smartphone.
Additional information:
Stop the vehicle manually if obstacles are
present.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
Depending on the option selected in the My
BMW app, the vehicle is either parked at
the end of the parking maneuver or you can
take control of the vehicle again.
The vehicle stores the driving movements of
the last distance covered. This stored distance
can be driven in reverse with automated steer-
ing.
System limits
The system takes over the steering. The driver
must control the speed using the accelerator
and brake pedals.
Due to ambient conditions, e.g., impaired Blue-
tooth connection transmission due to external
faults, Remote Control Parking may be inter-
rupted.
Back-up Assistant: a maximum of 164 ft/50 m
are stored.
If the power supply of the vehicle battery is
not sufficiently ensured, e.g., due to excessive
discharge, Remote Control Parking may not
be available. Follow the instructions in the My
BMW App.
Reversing Assistant Professional: a maximum
of 656 ft/200 m are stored.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
It may not be easy to maneuver into a parking
space. This function is offered on the My BMW
app but cannot be used due to ambient condi-
tions.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react to
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent, injury, and property damage. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready
to take over steering and braking at any time,
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Back-up assistant
Principle
The Back-up Assistant helps when reversing,
e.g., when pulling out of tight or unclear park-
ing or road situations.
Vehicle features and options
This system may not be available in the
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-
273
Parking
CONTROLS
Warning
Green: the system takes control of
steering.
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-
cle's surroundings.
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Watch surrounding traffic
closely and actively intervene where appro-
priate
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the
instructions for Park Distance Control.
5. Right before the end of the stored distance
covered, a signal tone will sound and a
message is displayed.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store
the distance covered.
Stop no later than when normal road traffic
is reached and take control of the vehicle
such as by shifting to forward gear.
To store the distance covered, do not drive
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.
Reversing Assistant Professional: suffi-
ciently bright light conditions on the saved
route.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
manually
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-
tant can be canceled manually:
▷
▷
Reversing Assistant Professional: the cam-
eras on the vehicle must be clean and clear.
▷
"Cancel": select the icon on the control
display.
Press the button.
Reversing Assistant Professional: The one-
off calibration of the camera after vehicle
delivery must be complete. Drive a few kilo-
meters in daylight to do so.
▷
Driving in reverse with automated
steering
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
2.
3.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button or engage reverse gear.
When shifting from reverse gear to another
selector lever position.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
"Start back-up Assistant"
The length of the distance covered is dis-
played on the control display and in the in-
strument cluster.
When exiting the stored lane when revers-
ing, for instance with maximum steering-
wheel angle.
If applicable, follow the instructions on the
control display or in the instrument cluster.
▷
When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-
tor pedal and the brake.
▷
▷
In case of a slippery surface.
When the vehicle is rolling such as on a
slope.
274
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
In case of changed ambient conditions.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷
Reversing Assistant Professional: if sensor
functionality is limited beyond approx. 164
ft/50 m.
System limits
▷
The maximum speed when reversing is
limited to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.
4 mph/7 km/h.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the
function is interrupted.
Different influences can lead to side deviations
when driving the stored distance covered in re-
verse. For example, this includes the following
factors:
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is
stationary while storing the distance cov-
ered.
▷
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance
covered.
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-
ents, inclines or slippery road surface.
Greatly deviating conditions when storing
and driving the route, for instance other
tires or changed ambient conditions like
weather.
▷
Reversing Assistant Professional: for
changed light conditions.
Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
275
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options BMW IconicSounds
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the vehicle drive sound can be
adjusted using BMW IconicSounds.
1.
Apps menu
Additional information:
2. "Vehicle"
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "IconicSounds"
Adaptive Suspension
Professional
6. Select the desired setting.
Adaptive Suspension Professional is an ac-
tively controlled suspension and includes the
following systems:
▷
▷
Adaptive suspension, refer to page 276.
Integral Active Steering, refer to page 217.
Adaptive suspension
Principle
The adaptive suspension reduces the move-
ment of the vehicle body when driving with a
sporty style or on uneven roads.
General information
Depending on the road condition, driving style
and selected drive mode, the electronically
controlled shock absorbers enable both in-
creased driving dynamics and improved driving
comfort.
▷
In SPORT driving mode: Increased driving
dynamics to support a sporty driving style.
▷
In all other drive modes: support for a com-
fort-oriented driving style.
276
Climate control
CONTROLS
Climate control
Icon
Function
Vehicle features and options
Fresh air.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Air flow.
Additional information:
Air distribution.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Climate control
SYNC program.
Overview
Seat heating.
Functions in the Climate menu
Active seat ventilation.
Steering wheel heating.
Icon
Function
Turn the climate control sys-
tem on/off.
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Buttons, automatic climate control
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
Air recirculation mode.
Icon
Function
Defrost function.
Automatic recirculated-air con-
trol.
Rear window defroster.
277
Climate control
CONTROLS
When the air conditioning system is turned
on, individual climate control functions can be
turned off.
Rear automatic climate control
Icon
Function
Automatic program.
Settings
You can configure individual settings for cli-
mate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:
Temperature.
Air flow.
▷
▷
Intensity of seat heating.
Pre-ventilation.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Air distribution.
Seat heating.
2. "Individual settings" or "General settings"
3. Select the desired setting.
Turning rear automatic climate
control on/off
Calling up climate control functions
The Climate menu can be accessed via iDrive:
Functional requirements
▷
Automatic climate control is turned on.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu on
the menu bar.
▷
Defrost function is deactivated.
Via iDrive
Or:
1.
Apps menu
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Climate control"
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Rear climate control"
5. Select the desired setting.
Turning the air conditioning system
on/off
The climate control system can be turned on or
off via iDrive.
The rear climate control can be activated with
the default settings for temperature and the
AUTO program:
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
"Activate with default settings"
2.
Tap the power button.
The entire climate control system is turned on
or off with the last settings applied.
278
Climate control
CONTROLS
Locking the rear automatic climate
control
Overview
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Lock rear climate control"
1
Settings
Automatic program
2
3
4
5
Air flow intensity
Climate control functions bar
Temperature
Principle
The automatic program ensures a comforta-
ble climate, which can be modified with the
desired temperature and individual settings.
Seat heating
Steering wheel heating
Active seat ventilation
The automatic program cools, ventilates or
heats the vehicle interior automatically.
Turning the automatic program
on/off
The AUTO program can be switched on or off
via iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the automatic
program provides the best possible settings
for climate control functions depending on
the outside temperature, interior temperature,
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-
perature setting:
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Air flow.
Air distribution.
Temperature.
2.
Tap the AUTO program button.
Seat heating.
Switching the rear climate control
automatic program on/off
Active seat ventilation.
Steering wheel heating.
Via iDrive
The automatic program takes seat occupancy
into account, regulating the climate in an en-
ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-
cupants.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-
trols the automatic program in order to prevent
window condensation to the extent possible.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Automatic climate"
5. Select the desired setting.
279
Climate control
CONTROLS
Via rear climate control display
Temperature
Tap the button.
Principle
The automatic climate control cools or heats
to the configured temperature and then keeps
the temperature constant.
Setting the intensity
When the automatic program is activated,
the intensity of individual climate control func-
tions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individu-
ally.
General information
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Setting the temperature
2. "Individual settings"
3. Select the desired setting.
Each level has a specific control range of the
intensity.
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is
not necessary to manually change the desired
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.
The individually selected settings of the cli-
mate control functions are stored and auto-
matically set up again such as after the vehicle
is started again.
You can set the desired temperature for driver
and front passenger individually on the menu
bar.
▷
▷
Raise the temperature.
Lower the temperature.
Display
The indicator on the menu bar provides infor-
mation about the temperature difference be-
tween the configured desired temperature and
current interior temperature.
Setting the rear automatic climate
control temperature
▷
The red or blue bar next to the temperature
display indicates the progress of heating or
cooling.
Via iDrive
▷
The desired interior temperature is reached
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Active climate control functions, e.g., seat
heating, are indicated by the icons on the
menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. Set the desired temperature.
280
Climate control
CONTROLS
Via rear climate control display
The temperature can be set individually for the
driver's side and front passenger side.
Adjusting the air flow
The air flow can be set via iDrive.
Set the desired temperature:
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
▷
▷
Raise the temperature.
Lower the temperature.
2.
Select the desired setting.
Footwell temperature
Automatic program:
General information
The air temperature in the footwell can be ad-
justed.
▷
Tap the large air flow icon to increase the
air flow.
▷
Tap the small air flow icon to reduce the air
flow.
This does not change the set interior tempera-
ture for the driver and front passenger.
Manual mode:
▷
▷
Tap up arrow: Increase air flow.
Tap down arrow: Reduce air flow.
Adjusting the footwell temperature
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Adjusting the air volume of the rear
climate control
2. "Individual settings"
Tap the icon on the rear climate control
display to set the desired intensity.
3. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
4. "Temperature adjustment for footwell"
5. Increase or decrease temperature.
Air distribution settings
Air flow
Principle
In manual mode, the air distribution can be
adjusted as needed.
Principle
The air flow generated by the blower can be
adjusted as needed.
Adjusting the air distribution
The air distribution can be set via iDrive:
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the
vehicle battery.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2.
Tap the air distribution icon on the
climate control functions bar.
3. Select the desired setting:
281
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Aim the air flow into the footwell, ar-
row 1.
Switching the cooling function on/off
The air conditioning can be switched on or off
via iDrive:
Aim the air flow toward the upper body
area, arrow 2.
Aim the air flow at the windshield , ar-
row 3.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
The selected air distribution is displayed.
2.
Tap the air conditioning button.
In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is au-
tomatically switched on to dry the air and avoid
window condensation.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
the side windows may fog up briefly when
drive-ready state is switched on.
When using the cooling mode, condensation
that will exit below the vehicle.
Adjusting the air distribution of the
rear climate control
Maximum cooling
Tap the icon on the rear climate control
display to set the desired air distribu-
tion.
Principle
Maximum cooling lets you cool the vehicle in-
terior quickly and effectively.
Air conditioning
The lowest temperature and the maximum air
flow are set automatically.
Principle
The function is automatically activated in the
rear when the SYNC program is turned on.
With the climate control function, the air inside
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then
warmed again depending on the temperature
settings.
Functional requirement
The following functional requirements must be
met for maximum cooling:
Functional requirement
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.
▷
The outside temperature is higher than ap-
prox. 32℉ / 0℃.
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.
282
Climate control
CONTROLS
button until the desired operating mode is
set.
Turning maximum cooling on/off
Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via
iDrive:
▷
▷
▷
Recirculating air.
Fresh air.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Automatic air recirculation.
2.
Tap the maximum cooling button.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the air recir-
culation turns off automatically after some time
based on the ambient conditions in order to
prevent condensation.
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
area. Open the vents.
Air recirculation mode
SYNC program
Principle
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the interior air.
Principle
If the SYNC program is activated, the settings
for the driver's side are transferred to the pas-
senger's side and to the rear.
In automatic recirculated-air control mode, out-
side air is fed in or the interior air recirculated
depending on the outside air quality.
For improved comfort, when the SYNC pro-
gram is deactivated, the following settings are
adjusted automatically in the automatic pro-
gram depending on seat occupancy:
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside
air is directed into the interior.
▷
If the front passenger seat is unoccupied,
the settings for the driver's side are applied
to the front passenger side.
General information
If there is window condensation, turn off the air
recirculation.
▷
If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the
default settings for the rear are applied.
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode.
When the seat is occupied again, the most re-
cent settings are reapplied.
General information
The following settings can be applied:
Turning air recirculation on/off
Air recirculation mode can be switched on or
off via iDrive:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.
Air flow.
Air distribution.
Automatic program.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. The current operating mode is displayed on
the climate control functions bar. Tap the
283
Climate control
CONTROLS
Turning the SYNC program on/off
The SYNC program can be switched on or off
via iDrive:
Rear window defroster
Principle
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-
densation are quickly removed from the rear
window.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Functional requirement
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.
2.
Tap the SYNC program button.
If the settings on the front passenger side or in
the rear are changed, the program is automati-
cally switched off.
Turning the rear window defroster
on/off
Press the rear window heating button
on the instrument panel.
Defrost function
The LED in the button illuminates
when the rear window heating is turned on.
Principle
With the defrost function, ice and condensation
are quickly removed from the windshield and
the front side windows.
The rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after a certain period of time.
The air flow and air temperature are automati-
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-
densation.
Seat heating
The air distribution is directed toward the
windshield and front side windows.
Principle
The system heats the seats as necessary.
If there is window condensation, turn on the
automatic program to take advantage of the
condensation sensor.
General information
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions
are turned on automatically with the tempera-
ture that was last set.
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-
vide maximum performance.
Turning the defrost function on/off
Adjusting seat heating
Press the defrost button on the instru-
ment panel.
Automatic program
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the system is switched on.
When the automatic program is activated, the
intensity of seat heating can be adjusted: As
you drive, the heater output is automatically
adjusted according to your set intensity.
Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-
shield and front side windows.
284
Climate control
CONTROLS
Adjusting seat heating manually
The heater output level can be adjusted man-
ually:
Adjusting the active seat ventilation
manually
The ventilation level can be adjusted manually:
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the
menu bar, arrow 1.
1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the
menu bar, arrow 1.
2.
Press the seat heating button re-
peatedly until the desired level is selected,
arrow 2.
2.
Press the seat ventilation button re-
peatedly until the desired level is selected,
arrow 2.
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-
lected, the heater output is reduced.
Steering wheel heating
Turning the rear automatic climate
control seat heating on/off
Principle
The system heats the steering wheel as nec-
essary.
Tap the icon on the rear climate control
display to set the desired heating out-
put level.
Adjusting steering wheel heating
Automatic program
Active seat ventilation
When the automatic program is activated, the
intensity of steering wheel heating can be ad-
justed. As you drive, the heater output is auto-
matically adjusted according to your set inten-
sity.
Principle
The system cools the seat and backrest as
necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat tempera-
ture.
Adjusting steering wheel heating
manually
Adjusting active seat ventilation
The heater output level can be adjusted man-
ually:
Automatic program
When the AUTO program is on, the intensity
of seat ventilation can be adjusted. As you
drive, the ventilation is automatically adjusted
according to the set intensity.
285
Climate control
CONTROLS
Front ventilation
1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the
menu bar, arrow 1.
▷
▷
Change the air flow direction, arrows 1.
Adjustment of the air volume at the vent,
arrows 2.
2.
Press the steering wheel heating
button repeatedly until the desired level is
selected, arrow 2.
Ventilation in the rear
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-
lected, the heater output is reduced.
Ventilation
Principle
The ventilation system offers individual adjust-
ment ranges for direct/indirect ventilation in or-
der to optimize the flow of air within the vehi-
cle.
▷
▷
Change the air flow direction, arrows 1.
Knurled wheel for variable opening and
closing of the air vents, arrows 2.
General information
Open the air vents and position them to ensure
effective air conditioning.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-
ing on the set desired temperature.
286
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
Ventilation in the rear, on the side
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens
are filtered.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
having the interior filter changed during vehicle
maintenance.
Pre-ventilation
Principle
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-
row 1.
The car's interior can be cooled or heated
before driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-
pending on set temperature and ambient tem-
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or pos-
sibly heated using the residual engine heat.
Knurled wheel for variable opening and
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.
Setting the ventilation
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-
sengers.
General information
The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time.
The activation time is determined based on
the outside temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure
time.
Air quality
General information
The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components:
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues to
run for some time after being switched off.
▷
▷
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.
Interior filter.
Functional requirements
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
Air conditioning system to control the
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
▷
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the
maximum activation time to save the vehi-
cle battery. The system will be available
again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
▷
Pre-ventilation.
Interior filter
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode.
▷
▷
Time and date are set correctly.
The ventilation air vents are open.
Depending on the equipment:
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-
flowing air.
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
287
Climate control
CONTROLS
Activating the departure time
Switching pre-ventilation on/off
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. "Departure plan"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Departure time
Display on the instrument cluster
General information
Different departure times can be set to ensure
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-
cle at the time of departure.
Icon
Description
Icon illuminates: a depar-
ture time is activated.
▷
One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
Icon flashes: pre-ventila-
tion is switched on.
The system is switched on once.
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
Activating with My BMW App
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW
App with remote functionality can be used to
turn on precooling at a preset departure time
or immediately.
On the desired weekdays, the system will
be switched on before the set departure
time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷
▷
Set departure times.
Pre-conditioning through
Remote Engine Start
Activate departure times.
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-
tween setting and activating the departure
time and the planned departure time to allow a
sufficient period of time for the air conditioning.
Principle
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte-
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable
temperature. The system automatically cools,
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex-
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may
be removed more easily.
Setting the departure time
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
The system starts the engine automatically
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Select the desired departure time.
6. Set the desired departure time.
7. Select day of the week, if needed.
288
Climate control
CONTROLS
Safety information
Enabling the automatic engine start
function
The automatic engine start must be enabled
before using the system. Otherwise, the en-
gine cannot switch on automatically to clima-
tize the car's interior.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-
lute the area in and around the vehicle or
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases
contain pollutants which are colorless and
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on
pre-conditioning in enclosed areas or areas
with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed
garages.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Remote Engine Start"
5. "Start engine for climate control"
6. Confirm the disclaimer.
Turning on/turning off the pre-
conditioning
Warning
When pre-conditioning is in operation, high
temperatures can occur underneath the
body, for instance caused by the exhaust
system. If combustible materials such as
leaves or grass come in contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system, these materials
can ignite. There is a risk of fire, injury, and
property damage. Make sure that no com-
bustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts during pre-conditioning, e.g.
leaves, grass, natural gas, gasoline, oil or
other combustible objects.
General information
The system switches off automatically after
max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.
The system can be switched on a maximum of
two times in a row.
The system will be available again as soon
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
tivated again.
Switching on via iDrive
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
Battery is sufficiently charged.
The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
Hood is closed.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Start now"
Switching on/off via vehicle key
The system can be switched on and off using
the vehicle key.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷
Air vents are opened.
289
Climate control
CONTROLS
Press the button on the vehicle key
three times within 1 second.
Setting the departure time
After operating the vehicle key, it takes
approx. 3 seconds for the engine to switch on.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
To switch off the system, press the button
again three times.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
Turning off with the Start/Stop button
This system can be turned off directly by push-
ing the Start/Stop button without depressing
the brake pedal.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
Activating the departure time
Air conditioning for departure time
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
General information
Scheduled departure times can be set up in
the system to ensure a comfortable interior
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-
ture.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
▷
One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
Display
The system is switched on once.
In the instrument cluster:
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week of the scheduled departure can
be set.
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the pre-condition-
ing. The vehicle is not ready to
drive.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷
▷
Set departure times.
Activate departure times.
Icon
Description
The system is activated automatically a few
minutes before the set departure time. The
system remains switched on for a short time
after the set departure time.
Icon on the instrument
panel.
Icon illuminates: a depar-
ture time is activated.
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can
only be activated once for the departure time.
Icon flashes: pre-condition-
ing is switched on.
The system will be available again as soon
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
tivated again.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
The activation of the system is confirmed by
flashing twice.
Observe the information about the intended
use of the vehicle.
Additional information:
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 9.
290
Climate control
CONTROLS
The parking lights are switched on as long as
the system is switched on.
291
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
risk of property damage. Make sure that the
travel path of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also fol-
low the safety information for the hand-held
transmitter.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Compatibility
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
If this icon is printed on the packaging
or in the operating instructions of the
remote-controlled system, the system
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-
versal remote control.
Integrated universal remote
control
Additional questions are answered by:
Principle
▷
An authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
The integrated universal remote control in the
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled
systems such as garage door openers, alarm
systems or locking systems.
▷
on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
For any additional questions, contact an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
General information
The integrated universal remote control re-
places up to three different hand-held trans-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-
grammed with the desired functions.
Operating elements on the interior
mirror
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system near metal objects
to ensure the best possible operation.
Safety information
Warning
▷
▷
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.
LED, arrow 2.
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control
such as the garage door may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in
a garage door. There is a risk of injury and
Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-
trolled system, arrow 3.
292
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Press and hold the button on the interior
mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform
this procedure three times.
Programming the integrated
universal remote control
If the integrated universal remote con-
trol remains nonoperational, continue
with the special features for rolling code
radio systems.
Functional requirement
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must
be fully charged at the time of programming
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated
universal remote control.
▷
LED does not illuminate green after
60 seconds: programming not com-
pleted.
Programming individual buttons
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
Repeat steps 3 to 5.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
2. Turn on standby state.
3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:
▷
▷
Program available button:
Press the button.
Program already assigned button:
Refer to information on synchronization in the
operating instructions of the remote-controlled
system.
Press and hold the button for approx.
20 seconds.
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly
begin flashing orange.
1. Program the desired button on the interior
mirror.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons
on the interior mirror.
2. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the remote-controlled system such as
on the garage door.
You have approx. 30 seconds for the next
step.
The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
second person.
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held
transmitter.
3. Press and hold the programmed button on
the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior mirror button and repeatedly press
and release the hand-held transmitter but-
ton for 2 seconds.
If necessary, repeat this step up to three
times in order to end synchronization. Once
synchronization is complete, the program-
med function will be carried out.
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:
Operation
After programming, the remote-controlled sys-
tem can be operated with the button on the
interior mirror.
▷
The LED illuminates green: program-
ming completed.
Release button.
▷
The LED flashes green rapidly: the
hand-held transmitter was detected but
programming is not complete.
293
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Press and hold the desired button of the re-
mote-controlled system within range until the
function is triggered.
Sockets
Principle
The socket can be used for electronic devi-
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is
switched on.
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously
illuminated green during the transmission of
the radio signal.
Deleting a button assignment
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-
vidually.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green
rapidly.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Safety information
All stored button assignments will be deleted.
Warning
Sun visor
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or
be thrown around in the car's interior while
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk
of property damage. Make sure that devices
and cables are not in the airbag's area of
unfolding.
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding the sun visor out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-
ward the side window.
Warning
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the
vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V
electrical system. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
jump-start terminals in the engine compart-
ment.
Folding the sun visor in
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-
hind a cover.
Warning
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,
these objects can cause a short circuit and
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury
294
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
and risk of property damage. Make sure to
prevent metal objects from falling or being
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after
using the socket.
In the front center console
Front center armrest
Two USB ports are located in the center con-
sole.
Properties:
▷
▷
USB port Type C.
For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
The center armrest contains a socket.
▷
Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.
In the rear center console
USB port
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec-
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the
section on USB connections.
Additional information:
USB connection, see Owner's Manual for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication;
Two USB ports are located in the center con-
sole in the rear passenger compartment.
Safety information
Properties:
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.
Warning
For charging mobile devices.
Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,
these objects can cause a short circuit and
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. Make sure to
prevent metal objects from falling or being
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after
using the socket.
295
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Attaching optional accessories
1. Slide the cover down.
Travel & Comfort system
General information
The front seat backrests have mounts and var-
ious connection options:
▷
Mounts for attaching optional accessories,
e.g., universal holders for tablets or coat
hangers.
▷
USB ports.
Properties of the USB ports:
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.
2. Mount the optional accessories, refer to As-
sembly Instructions.
For charging mobile devices.
Charge current: maximum 3 A / 45 W per
seat.
Wireless charging tray
For more information, contact an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Principle
The wireless charging tray is used to wirelessly
charge Qi-certified smartphones.
Overview
General information
Quick charging functions are supported de-
pending on the smartphone.
The integrated fan cools the device to be
charged.
When inserting the smartphone to be charged,
make sure that there is nothing between the
smartphone to be charged and the wireless
charging tray.
The mounts for attaching optional accessories
are located behind the marked covers.
The charging process is shown by the
charge indicator on the control display.
The USB ports are located behind the marked
covers.
Safety information
Warning
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on
the tray together with the device can become
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-
296
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
tion correctly when placed together on the
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. When charging
mobile devices, make sure there are no ob-
jects on the tray together with the device.
Inserting a smartphone
Place the smartphone in the middle of the tray
on the driver's side, with the display facing up.
Forgotten warning
General information
A warning may be issued if a Qi-certified
smartphone was forgotten in the wireless
charging tray when leaving the vehicle.
Overview
Tray in the center console:
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. "Mobile phone reminder"
1
Storage area
Fan
2
System limits
Functional requirements
The charge current may be reduced or charg-
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-
less charging tray in the following situations:
▷
The smartphone to be charged must be Qi-
certified.
▷
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
Charging function is turned on.
▷
▷
▷
Due to excessive temperatures on the tray
and smartphone.
The smartphone cannot exceed maximum
dimensions of approx. 6.69 x 3.34 x
0.7 in/170 x 85 x 18 mm.
If there are objects between the smart-
phone and wireless charging tray.
If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic
stripes, or cards for signal transmission, are
located between the smartphone and wire-
less charging tray.
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-
able for wireless charging.
The smartphone to be charged is located
in the center of the tray. The smartphone
display is facing up.
▷
▷
Due to protective sleeves and covers that
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm
Activating/deactivating charging
1.
Due to protective sleeves and covers made
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic
parts.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. "Wireless charging"
297
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Due to add-on parts for the smartphone,
e.g., holders.
be verified in regular intervals, especially when
borders are frequently crossed.
By configuring the smartphone settings,
e.g., for charging. Follow the instructions
given on the control display and smart-
phone, as applicable.
Other users and occupants of the vehicle must
be informed about the system. In addition, in-
formation about the system is required when
handing off the vehicle.
Data transfer and data storage
Whether recording data will be sent or stored
depends on the recording function.
Interior camera
Principle
Interior camera:
The interior camera can be used to record the
vehicle interior.
▷
Data transfer to a mobile device, connec-
tion to the vehicle via WLAN.
▷
Data is saved to the vehicle and assigned
to the BMW ID or driver profile.
General information
The interior camera can provide the following
functions:
Remote Inside View:
▷
Sending data to a mobile device via the My
BMW App, connected with ConnectedDrive
account.
▷
Interior camera.
You can record, save and display media.
Remote Inside View.
▷
▷
Data is saved to the My BMW App and,
after data is sent, to the mobile device.
The vehicle interior can be recorded using
the My BMW App.
Anti-theft recorder:
▷
Anti-theft recorder.
▷
Sending data to a mobile device via the My
BMW App, connected with ConnectedDrive
account.
If the alarm system is triggered, the vehicle
interior is automatically recorded. Record-
ings can also be played using the My BMW
App.
▷
Data is stored in the vehicle and after the
data transfer in the mobile device.
More information on the scope and content of
data processing is available on the Internet in
the ConnectedDrive privacy notices/service de-
scriptions.
Data protection
General information
The permissibility of recording and using re-
cordings is contingent upon the statutory regu-
lations of the country in which the system is to
be used. The user is responsible for the use of
the system and compliance with the respective
regulations.
Occupying the seats
The interior camera is also used for the detec-
tion of occupied seats.
When all doors are closed, the interior camera
switches on automatically on a regular basis.
This system analyzes the vehicle interior to
detect which seats are occupied. No media
recordings are made in the process. Two in-
frared light sources next to the camera lens
illuminate while the interior camera is active.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you verify there are no statutory or regulatory
restrictions on using the system in your region
or country prior to initial use. In addition, the
laws with respect to use of the system should
298
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Depending on the lighting conditions, the infra-
red light sources may be visible.
Activating/deactivating interior
camera
Prior to the first use of the interior camera,
the recording function and, if necessary, data
transfer must be activated. To do this, confirm
the query on the control display. Additional
activation may be required for some system
functions.
Functional requirements
Interior camera:
▷
Privacy Policy accepted.
Data protection, refer to page 69.
The camera is activated.
▷
Follow applicable legal regulations.
To transfer recordings to mobile devices:
The recording function or data transfer can be
deactivated or activated.
▷
▷
Data transfer is activated.
Mobile device is connected to the vehicle
via WLAN.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
Remote Inside View/Anti-theft recorder:
3. "Interior camera"
4. "Settings"
▷
▷
Privacy Policy accepted.
My BMW App is installed on the mobile de-
vice.
5. Select the desired setting.
▷
My BMW App is linked with the Connected-
Drive account.
Interior camera
▷
▷
Vehicle is parked and locked.
Recording mode
Anti-theft recorder: equipped with alarm
system.
Recording
mode
Function
Ensure that the faces of occupants are visible
and are not partially or completely covered, for
instance by face masks.
"Single
photo"
Shortly after triggering, a
photo will be taken.
Overview
"Smile"
When the system detects a
smile, a picture will be taken.
"Self-timer
(3 sec.)"
After the timer has expired, a
photo will be taken.
"Burst
mode"
Shortly after triggering, a ser-
ies of pictures will be taken.
Take picture
1.
Apps menu
The interior camera is located on the head-
liner.
2. "All apps"
3. "Interior camera"
4. "Photo"
Additional information:
Around the headliner, refer to page 35.
5. Select desired recording mode.
6. Triggering a photo.
299
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Depending on the selected recording mode,
the photo occurs shortly after the triggering,
when a smile is recognized or the timer has
elapsed.
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting.
An individual gesture can be assigned for re-
cordings with the interior camera.
For burst shots, the series of pictures will be
displayed as a preview.
Remote Inside View
Recordings of the vehicle interior can be
played on a mobile device using the My BMW
App in order to check the vehicle interior, e.g.,
for forgotten objects.
Recording video
1. "MENU"
2. "All apps"
3. "Interior camera"
4. "Video"
The function is not suitable for monitoring peo-
ple or animals left behind.
5. Start video recording.
You can only record video for a certain time.
Anti-theft recorder
If the alarm system is triggered, the vehicle in-
terior is automatically recorded. The My BMW
App issues a notification when recordings are
being taken. The recording can be shown on a
mobile device.
Displaying and managing
recordings
Saved recordings can be displayed, transferred
and deleted in the vehicle.
Up to three recordings can be saved to the
vehicle and synchronized with the My BMW
App. If the vehicle is reset to factory settings,
recordings saved to the vehicle are deleted.
With some national-market versions, record-
ings are only shown on the control display
when the vehicle speed is less than approx.
2 mph/3 km/h for safety reasons.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Interior camera"
4. "Gallery"
5. Select the desired recording.
6. Select the desired setting.
Scan the QR code shown on the control dis-
play to send recordings to a mobile device.
The recording is transferred when the pop-up
on the mobile device is opened. The mobile
device must be connected to the vehicle via
WLAN.
Settings
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Interior camera"
300
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
Warning
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. Attached objects
could come loose. There is a risk of injury and
risk of property damage. Do not use anti-slip
pads.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Glove compartment
Safety information
Opening the glove compartment
Warning
When driving, loose items or devices con-
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
Press the button.
Warning
Closing the glove compartment
Open flaps of the storage compartments,
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,
protrude into the interior when folded open
and may be in the way of an airbag that
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in
the event of an accident or when braking or
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Always close storage compartments
immediately after use.
Fold the lid closed.
Locking the glove compartment
The glove compartment can be locked with
an integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment has been locked,
the vehicle key can be given to someone with-
out the integrated key, for example, when the
car is being parked by a parking attendant.
Additional information:
Integrated key, refer to page 75.
301
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Opening the center armrest
Storage compartments in
the doors
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
Safety information
Warning
Press the button.
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or
glasses can break in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-
ken glass can be scattered in the car's in-
terior. There is a risk of injury and risk of
property damage. Do not use any breakable
objects while driving. Only stow breakable
objects in closed storage compartments.
Closing the center armrest
Press both lids down until they engage.
Front cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Storage tray in center
console
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury and risk of property
damage. Do not force objects into the cup
holder. Make sure that drink containers are
secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do
not transport hot beverages.
The center console has storage compart-
ments.
Additional information:
Wireless charging tray, refer to page 296.
Front center armrest
General information
Storage compartments are located in the cen-
ter armrest between the seats.
302
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Overview
Overview
Two cup holders are located in the center con-
sole.
Two cup holders are located in the center arm-
rest.
Rear cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Coat hooks
General information
The coat hooks are located in the grab handles
in the rear.
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury and risk of property
damage. Do not force objects into the cup
holder. Make sure that drink containers are
secured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do
not transport hot beverages.
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident, injury, and property damage. When
suspending clothing articles from the coat
hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the
driver's view.
Warning
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury
and risk of property damage. Only hang light-
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
from the coat hooks.
303
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk
of property damage. Stow and secure objects
and cargo properly.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Loading
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Safety information
Warning
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the
tires, damage them internally and cause
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-
ducing directional stability, lengthening the
braking distances and changing the steering
response. There is a risk of accident, injury,
and property damage. Pay attention to the
permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires
and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle
weight.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
the vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs).
Warning
When driving, loose items or devices con-
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Secure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
304
Cargo area
CONTROLS
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to the
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.
General information
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw
straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.
Payload
Overview
The maximum payload is the sum of the
weight of the occupants and the cargo.
The lashing eyes are located in the cargo area.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Multifunction hook
Stowing and securing cargo
▷
▷
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
General information
A multifunction hook is located on the left and
right side in the cargo area.
Fasten the aids for securing the load to the
lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Safety information
Small and light cargo: secure with tension-
ing straps or tension bands or with a lug-
gage compartment net.
Warning
▷
▷
Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Only hang lightweight objects from the multi-
function hooks. Heavy luggage in the cargo
area must be properly secured.
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear seat backrests.
▷
Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as
possible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear
seat is not occupied, secure each of the
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.
305
Cargo area
CONTROLS
if necessary, fold down the rear seat back-
rest, refer to page 307.
Weight
The multifunction hooks can only hold items
with a maximum weight of 7 lbs/3 kg.
Storage compartment on
the right side
Depending on the equipment:
A storage compartment is available on the
right side of the cargo area.
2. Remove the storage compartment.
Storage compartment on
the left side
Depending on the equipment:
A storage compartment is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
3. Slightly lift the storage tray with the wheel
change set and emergency wheel and pull
it to the back.
With emergency wheel:
enlarging the cargo area
Principle
The emergency wheel and any related compo-
nents can be temporarily removed to enlarge
the cargo area.
Removing the emergency wheel
and the storage compartments
1. To remove the cargo area floor, pull it up-
ward directly behind the rear backrests and,
4. Remove the emergency wheel, wheel
change set and storage tray.
5. Insert the cargo area floor.
Inserting the emergency wheel and
the storage compartments
Proceed in reverse order to insert the emer-
gency wheel and the storage compartments.
306
Cargo area
CONTROLS
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
Enlarging the cargo area
Principle
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrests.
General information
Folding down the rear seat backrest
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The right rear seat backrest and
the center section can be folded down sepa-
rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded
down together with the center section.
From the cargo area
1. Unlock the belt lock of the center seat belt
in the rear using the buckle tongue of an-
other seat belt.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the cargo area. The center section can be
separately folded down from the rear.
2. Insert the buckle tongue at the end of the
belt into the specially designated fixture on
the rear shelf.
Safety information
Warning
Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts
jammed when folding down the rear seat
backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear seat backrest including
head restraint is clear when folding down.
3. Push the corresponding head restraint
down as far as it will go.
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo
area to release the rear seat backrest. The
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat
backrest is locked after folding it back.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
307
Cargo area
CONTROLS
unlocked rear seat backrest moves forward
slightly.
Locking/unlocking the center
section
You can lock the center section to prevent it
from being folded down from the rear, e.g.,
when handing your vehicle over to a valet
parking service.
1. Fold down the left rear seat backrest with
middle section.
2.
▷
▷
To lock: Push the lock forward.
To unlock: Push the lock backward.
5. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
3. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seat position and engage it.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seat position and engage it.
2. Release the buckle tongue from the fixture
on the rear shelf.
3. Insert the buckle tongue in the belt lock of
the center seat belt. Make sure you hear
the buckle tongue engage.
Folding down middle section
Pull lever and fold the center section forward.
308
Cargo area
CONTROLS
309
